Home

to Open Manual File - American Musical Supply

1. USB Flash Memory YES Floppy Disk 2HD 2DD External Adaptor via USB TO DEVICE bu Hard Disk External Adaptor via USB TO DEVICE Flash Memory Internal 1 4 MB 560 KB Memory Card SmartMedia etc External Adaptor via USB TO DEVICE Tempo Range 5 500 Tap Tempo Tempo Metronome Yes Sound Bell on off Registration Buttons 8 Memory Regist Sequence Freeze YES Demo YES Language for Display 6 Languages English Japanese German French Spanish Italian Others Direct Access YES Transpose Keyboard Song Master Scale Type 9 Computer USB to HOST YES Connection USB to DEVICE YES PHONES MIDI IN OUT FOOT PEDAL 1 2 AUX IN R L L R OUTPUT R L L R LAN MIC INPUT VOLUME MIC LINE IN VIDEO OUT VOLUME SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO SOFT GLIDE PORTAMENTO Other Connectors Pedal Functions PITCHBEND MODULATION S ARTICULATION PSR S900 DSP VARIATION SONG PLAY PAUSE STYLE START STOP etc Speakers Speakers 12 cm 4 cm dome X 2 12 cm 5 cm X 2 Power Consumption 40 W 35 W Dimensions W X D X H 1003 mm X 433 mm X 148 mm 39 5 8 X 17 1 8 X 5 7 8 Weight 11 5 kg 25 Ibs 5 5 8 oz Headphones HPE 150 HPE 30 Footswitch FC4 FC5 Foot Controller FC7 Optional Floppy Disk Drive UD FDO1 accessories AC Power Adaptor PA 300B PA 300 L 6 L 7 Keyboard stand The exterior size of the PSR 900 700 is beyond the limits as described in y the L 6
2. 0 A S 2 1 2 6 5 e e c s 9 d z le Q DN i LLURLULUU mr TRY 1 1 nni T YE ITI Ee Press the STYLE CONTROL COUNTRY button STYLE ojJ amp ee o mz o emw o wmen 9 sua 0 RaB Lo pattroom Jwonio o Jpance Jcountry o JMO o useR PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Enabling tempo display above Style name You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 2 Select the B 2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO button and use the 5 A V 6 A V buttons to switch the tempo dis play on off ON Tempo is displayed above the Style name With the default settings the Display Style Tempo function is on OFF Tempo is not displayed above the Style name 2 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Style CountryPop STYLE Pro 118 Pro 4 148 ta NewCountry les Bluegrass Pro 47 88 Pro 4 128 EasyCountry le Hoedown 291 Pro 4 4 Pro 4 70 sChartCntry ss FolkPop Pro 4 8 Pro d 72 Is CountryStrum Ia CountryBallad las 4 178 e 4 148 SB CountryHits 6 CountryPop REPER L e TOIRE UP COPY BM The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Pr
3. Connecting a Microphone PSR S900 only 1 Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone 2 Set the INPUT VOLUME knob on the rear panel of the instrument to the minimum position 3 Connect the microphone to the MIC LINE IN jack BOG Always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when nothing is con nected to the MIC LINE IN jack Since the MIC LINE IN jack is 3 25 A highly sensitive it may pick up and produce noise even when 7 EE nothing is connected O O Ca MIC INPUT lI LINE IN VOLUME LINE MIC DOU0000U0000000000 4 Set the LINE MIC switch to MIC 5 For microphones having a power source turn on the power first Adjust the INPUT VOLUME knob while singing into the microphone Adjust the control while checking the SIGNAL lamp The SIGNAL lamp is Mic SETTING located at the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button at the left side of VOCAL HARMONY MIN MAX the top panel This lamp lights to indicate that an audio signal is being T DN received Make sure to adjust the control so the lamp lights in green Make SIGNAL NPUT sure that the lamp does not light in red since this indicates that the input VOLUME level is too high Disconnecting the microphone Set the INPUT VOLUME knob on the rear panel of the instrument to the minimum position 2 Disconnect the microphone from the MIC LINE IN jack BI Set the INPUT VOLUME knob to the minimum position before turnin
4. BASS display Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 204 These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback based on the note messages received via MIDI The note on off messages received at the chan nel s set to ON are recognized as the bass note of the chord of Style playback The bass note will be detected regardless of the ACMP or split point settings When several channels are simultaneously set to ON the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels SYSTEM TRANSMIT RECEIVE BASS CHORDDETECT m OW BASS NOT n ALL 1234567 8 3 1 i 12 13 1d 15 16 OFF WIDI UB10 OOOO OOOOOOCO000 USB2 o0000000000000000 ewe UUNIUTIPTUR EN Oe a CEEE E 1 2 3 6 7 8 Operation Select the channel and set the ON OFF for that chan nel Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF CHORD DETECT display Setting the Chord Type for Style Play back via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Opera tion on page 204 These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback based on the note messages received via MIDI The note on off messages received at the chan nel s set to ON are recognized as the notes for detecting chords
5. 5 Use the VOL VOICE FILTER REVERB HALL2 21919191919 CHORUS CHORUS2 9 9 91919 64 64 TUNE 19 T DLY CHO3 MIXING CONS DSP2 4 HALL3 HALL3 OLE VOL VOICE FILTER TUNE EFFECT TYPE E BLOCK DSP4IRIGHT11 CATEGORY REVERB TYPE tHALL3 DIT cA DELAY ER KRRROKE CHORUS FLANGER PHASER DIS TEGORY TORTION WAH DYHAMIC ROTARY SP Effect Block Effect applicable parts Effect characteristics REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club CHORUS All parts Produces a rich fat sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously DSP1 STYLE PART In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types SONG CHANNNEL 1 16 the instrument has special DSP effects that include additional effects usually used for a specific part such as distortion and tremolo DSP2 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT Any unused DSP blocks are automatically DSP3 SONG CHANNEL 1 16 assigned to the appropriate parts channels DSP4 as needed Microphone sound Handled only by DSP4 PSR S900 6 Use the 3 A V 4 A V buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect DSP Stands for Digital Signal Proces sor or Processing DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of eff
6. The special website can be opened when directly connect ing to the Internet Depending on the Internet con nection you may not be able to connect to two or more devices for example a computer and the instrument depending on the contract with the provider This means you cannot connect with the PSR S900 S700 If in doubt check your contract or contact your provider Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices such as com puter musical instrument etc Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port Connect the Wireless Game Adaptor to the LAN port A USB wireless LAN adaptor also can be used PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 171 yausa U au O j eutQ 00Z5 006S 3Sd eui SuNoeuU0D Accessing the Special Website Accessing the Special Website From the special website you can audition and purchase Song data among other things To access the site press the INTERNET button while the instrument is con nected to the Internet MAIN TRANSPOSE 0 UPPER OCTAVE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 L F 2 Live RIGHT1 T _JGrandPiand Live RIGHTZ B SA Strings G Cool LEFT F GalaxyEP 4 avd 4 120 MULTI PAD amp Y1Straight8Pop BS E Gtri6BtCuti D CHORD REGIST S9 lees NewBank E BAL
7. B Playing three different Voices with the left and right Hands Right 1 2 and Left parts You can combine these three parts to create a rich ensemble sound LEFT RIGHT RIGHT Holp LEFT 1 2 LOWER UPPER Right 2 part o fa c RES PART ON OFF Right 1 part NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNSS Left part 84 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Right 1 and 2 Parts You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts 2 5 6 7 Make sure the PART ON OFF RIGHT 1 button is turned on Press the PART ON OFF RIGHT 2 button to turn it on LEFT HOLD LOWER UPPER Co lo NB Pu PART ON OFF LEFT RIGHT RIGHT Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Right 2 part VOICE orano o gass Oo onew 50 fanmonica CO DRUM kir o Jepiano Jsaxoruowe O TRuwe GHOIR amp O Jonaaw FLUTES Co _ strines o Aono O Jerass o JBYNTH o Juser Press the TAB lt 4 button to select the PRESET display VOICE RIGHT2 USER USBI Sweet asumen m Accordion l TuttiAccordion la SmallAccordion mm SoftAccordion m BallroomAcc m Bandoneon g steirisch em moderntiarp E MAME CUT copy PASTE DELETE SAVE lt i VOICESET INFO UP FOLDER DEMO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8. iis WJ L A Y 3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory pro grammed settings by pressing the 4A button 4 Press the D button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 79 c S Z S o eo O o a w ea 80 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File For the items below you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall 2 3 Make all desired settings on the instrument Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt gt SYSTEM RESET Press one of the F I buttons to call up the relevant display for sav ing your data SYSTEM SETUP Parameters set on the various displays such as the FUNCTION UTILITY and microphone setting display are handled as a single System Setup file Refer to the Data List for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are handled as a single file USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types user master EQ types and user vocal harmony types PSR S900 created via the Mixing Console dis
9. BOG Song In this manual the word Song refers to performance data Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing The instrument includes several preset Songs This section covers basic information on playing back the preset Songs Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display SONG SELECT 2 Press the A button to select the Sample Song category SONG es o4 MEME E C COPY 3 Press one of the A E buttons to select the desired Song You can also select the file by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute BEGG You can instantly jump back to the Main display by double clicking on one of the A E buttons A Press the SONG gt 11 PLAY PAUSE button to start playback REC L H lt lt gt gt COE L NEW SONG START 1 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 5 Press the SONG 9m STOP button to stop playback m s L lt lt gt gt Co JCC L NEW L SYNC START Playing Songs saved to USER page 73 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display 2 Press the TAB 4 gt buttons to select the USER tab SONG USER 3 Press one of the A buttons to select the desired Song Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device page 73 A CAUTION Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk
10. Press the TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously MAIN TRANSPOSE 1 UPPER OCTAVE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 L F 2 dvd 4 128 SONG J jLive RIGHT1 ua Newsong E JGrandPiang TRANSPOSE 1 ss Straight8Pop E Gtr16BtCuti REGIST 5 gti NewBank BALANCE 100 100 85 100 100 100 oo oe oe ee SONG STYLE M PAD NIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 Applying Effects to Your Voice PSR S900 You can also apply various effects to your voice Press the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button to call up the Mic Setting display MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY r e 2 Press the 4A V 5 A V buttons to turn the effect on BET Selecting an effect type You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console page 95 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 59 60 Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice PSR S900 You can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice select a Song which contains chord data page 36 If the Song contains this data the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not Press the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button to call up the harmony vocals Vocal Harmony Setting display MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HARMONY ON x g MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HRHONY TYPE H 4 a gt SIGNAL MIC SETTING l m VOCAL TALK MIG EFFEGT HARHON on O
11. A ot ani E 2 Press the 5 A V button to select the half note length 3 Play the chords C F and G in the chord section of the keyboard 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL BREAK button o anna gt i i 388 A Y Y Y a o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD gt 160 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 5 6 7 co 11 12 13 14 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Press the 6 A W button to select the quarter note length Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard Press the STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARIATION B button MAIN VARIATION Oo O B C x o A 7 g 3 4 5 6 7 8 p a a A 4 A A A A erT 8 Press the 4 A V button to select the whole note length Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard Press the SONG Bl STOP button to move the cursor to the begin ning of the Song Press the SONG gt HH PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display If you want you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner page 162 Press the F EXPAND bu
12. Press the SONG Bl STOP button to move the cursor to the begin ning of the Song Press the SONG gt Hl PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display If you want you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner page 162 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 N CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 159 Recording Your Performance to MIDI sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursp Recording Your Performance to MIDI Recording Chords You can record Chords and Sections Intro Main Ending and so on one at a time with precise timing These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function The explanations here apply to step 7 of the Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 152 ms oe emm UE 1E 2 3 5 6 8 9 The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers Make sure the STYLE CONTROL AUTO FILL IN button is set to OFF then press the STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARIATION A button MAIN VARIATION M ML ERR BERT GLE F Fis Fis FA m gt 3 6 7 8 4
13. Computer Instrument Connecting to the Internet LAN Port There are three ways to use the LAN port to access special Internet websites and download song data etc See page 171 for instructions on connecting What is MIDI Put simply MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows easy and comprehensive control among electronic digi tal music instruments and other devices To get a better idea of what MIDI does let s first consider acoustic instruments such as a grand piano and a classical gui tar With the piano you strike a key and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note With the gui tar you directly pluck a string and the note sounds But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note pro duction Ney Internal amp rea Internal amp O R Electric circuit Based on playing information from the keyboard a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound As shown in the illustration above in an electronic instrument the sampled note previously recorded note stored in the tone generator section electronic circuit is played based on information received from the key board Now let s examine what happens when we
14. Super Articulation Nu 83 Synchro Start Song Synchro Start Style Synehito SOP asoan ana Synchro Stop Window ETA a E E T 162 MNA ear a re EN 207 T TALK qe a Ea R E EE TALK SETTING Tap FUNCOM eR IUe Tempo TERE uses Time Signature TOP TOUCH TRANSMIT Transpose TUNE ia U WIP ie E AIE E E E E A T E EE USB Audio Recorder USB Storage Device USB TO DEVICE terminal USB TO HOST terminal m WISER Wc V Vibrato eese VIDEO QUT siess Vocal CueTIME Vocal Harmony VOCAL HARMONY EDIT VOCAL HARMONY TYPE VOICE MC VOICE DUMOMS ete ette tet testet eie e eene Voice Program Change Number sse 209 Voice Set VON OIGE s oxeee ick senes essat ease b a Eu onda ese nae mies peo ue 92 Volume balance eeee eene 41 VOEUMLE AT LACK 52 ncs esvat evo apa iSSi 104 Ww WEROKMEISTIER 52 estia pe eer exei enanas iei Wireless Game Adaptor Wireless LAN ciccevesseesicstenars toe nener erra akiniais PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 219 xipueddy Panel Button Chart The position of the button on the panel can be confirmed by the Panel Controls page 14 Number M 1 A WI IBA Wissen e MAIN VARIATION IAT IBVICI ID ns MASTER VOLUME erret e MEMORY ccscsecesecse
15. Pausing and restarting your recording To pause recording press the SONG gt El PLAY PAUSE button during recording To restart recording follow the operations shown below For recording to TR 1 TR 2 press the SONG gt HH PLAY PAUSE button e For recording to EXTRA TR press the STYLE CONTROL SYNC START button then play in the chord section of the keyboard N CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 About Channels See page 151 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 149 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea BuIA un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c B eG o 9 ob c TD Recording Your Performance to MIDI 2 Setting all of the 5 16 chan nels to REC simultaneously While holding the SONG REC button press the SONG EXTRA TR button 3 When selecting the MIDI part e Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1 16 is recorded When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record this records data only over the set MIDI channel meaning the external device must also be set to
16. Make sure that the NTSC or PAL setting corresponds to the standard of your particular video equipment page 194 Some flashing parallel lines appear in the television or video monitor Occasionally some flashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor This does not necessarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning For optimum results try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself The monitor you are using may not show the instru ment s display contents as expected Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as rec ommended the monitor you are using may not show the instrument s display contents as expected e g the dis play contents may not fit on the screen the characters may not be completely clear or the colors may be incor rect PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 214 Microphone Vocal harmony PSR S900 The microphone input signal cannot be recorded The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song Style recording Use the USB Audio Recorder func tion page 63 Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound Vocal Harmony is set to ON Turn Vocal Harmony off page 60 The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out of tune Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds such as the Style sound from the instrument In particular bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony To remedy this Sing as cl
17. doatnaoatanse e SONG P BB PLAY PAUSE 19 SONG 44 P REW FF ee F ONERE DECIO 9 S SONG REC nre xe ete REM EN i6 FADE IN OUT ASTAETETSEETRSNPTRRSTUS UNO RE REPENRESS STOP EE TA URN ERE e SONG SELECT DOREM 8 FREEZE 539 RR PIER ROUEN ROSEN TORRES Eads ase eS AS dse ROSSER HES ea NN EERE e STANDBY ON DE S M 2505 585 0585 5056 9 Q L LZ2ZlleV LZ o FUNCTION reete o STYLE DUtONS des criteri a tdietete dera em oae e STYLE CONTROL START STOP eee e G SUSTAIN eerte teneret e SYNC START esee e GUIDE n rre e ISYNC STOP ee e H T HARMONY CHO nunc eeeeeene rnnt eeenennnnnnonn 9 TAB M 1 TAP TEMPO cccccsssscsecececscsescecscsvsececersvsvsececersvsveeseeees 23 TEMPO VET asena eia amp INTERNET c ccscsececesscscsececscsesececscscsesececersvsvsecesevevaneecees a SR a I EAE INTRO I II e uet ea L TRANSPOSE M amp LCD CONTRAST eerte tenet e U LYRICS TEXT PSR S900 scsececesesseceseeessvsessessveveseeees LYRICS PSR S700 cesesecescssesececeesesescececsvsvseeessvevsneecees oOo OCTAVE TEE Jit rasne t x V pz amp EVAR IT segs et UU RU dee eee 56 VOICE DUON Seieren r ar or pee teo Enea corren 220 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America hereafter referred to as Yamaha warrants to the original consumer of a pro
18. c 98 5 T S 2 O 3 wn amp ea 66 Basic Operation The language selected here is also used for various Mes sages shown during operations PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Selecting Message Language You can select the desired language of the display messages Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt OWNER 2 Use 4 A V 5A V LANGUAGE buttons to select the language 3 Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display a TAB gt Unum S OU OWHER OWNER NANE 5 O CJ 4 liz menm f CJ B 4 C C e 4 C BRCKUP D CU E C pee C3 C ENGLISH unius JAPANESE C3 t Reston APANES TEN en FRENCH SPANISH ITALIAN FUNCTION 1 2 3 7 8 A A A A A Y Y Y Y Y EXIT The Messages Shown in the Display A message information or confirmation dialog sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation When the message appears simply press the appropriate button UTILITY C a F Are you sure you want to format this 5 device USB1 G Make sure there is no important data in the disk before formatting c otherwise all data will be deleted H E J When the media is inserted to the ONG AUTO OPEN device selected in the device list
19. f you are connecting two or three devices at the same time such as two USB storage devices and a LAN adap tor you should use a USB hub device The USB hub must be self powered with its own power source and the power must be on Only one USB hub can be used If an error message appears while using the USB hub disconnect the hub from the instrument then turn on the power of the instrument and re connect the USB hub Though the instrument supports the USB 1 1 standard you can connect and use a USB 2 0 storage device with the instrument However note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1 1 To protect your data write protect To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased apply the write protect provided with each storage device or media If you are saving data to the USB storage device make sure to disable write protect PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 3 a o o 6 mE o 35 23 Quick Guide Playing the Demos The Demos are more than just songs they also provide helpful easy to understand introductions to the features functions and operations of the instrument In a way the Demos are an interactive mini man ual complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you Oooo 00000 MERNI select the desired Language 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION JIUTILITY TAB 4
20. Only the rhythm channel plays Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on press the ACMP button You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard Styles cannot be selected e If the size of the Style data is large about 120 KB or greater the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be ready by the instrument The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating the chord Refer to Chord Types Recognized in the Fin gered Mode of the Data List The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 You may be playing the keys according to a different fin gering mode and not the one currently selected Check the accompaniment mode and play the keys according to the selected mode page 107 Synchro Stop cannot be turned on Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard or when the ACMP button is set to off Make sure the fin gering mode is set to something besides Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard and set the ACMP button to on Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regard less of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard This is normal if the fingering mode is set to Full Key board or Al Full Keyboard If either of the
21. Press the F YES button to call up the Style selection display and save the panel settings as a Style file page 73 N CAUTION The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 51 52 The Multi Pads The Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances Multi Pads are grouped in Banks or four each The PSR S900 S700 features a variety of Multi Pad Banks in a variety of different musical genres Playing the Multi Pads 1 Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL SELECT button to call up the Multi Pad Bank selection display then select the desired Bank MULTI PAD s Funkyctrisets le E Gtr16BtCut2 le DiscoGuitar SELECT 1 2 3 4 STOP Ant e E Gtr 16BtCut3 e E Gtr16BtShfl1 e FunkyGtr16Bt1 le E Gtr 16BtShfl2 oe FunkyGtr16Bt2 S E Gtr 16BtPick MULTI PAD P2 P PS P6 NEXT MULTI PAD CONTROL COPY EDIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 3 9 3 3C vi FV Fv Fv Fv Fv Fv gv Select pages using the 1 A 7 A buttons that correspond to P1 P2 in the display then use the A J buttons to select the desired bank 2 Press any of the MULTI PAD CONTROL 1 4 buttons to play the
22. Set current page as Home Restore default Home Show images Tin Japanese EUC zs l Japanese Shift JIS CONTROL MENU A v canceL Operations in the Special Website 6 To execute the setting press the 3 A ENTER button To cancel press the 3 Y CANCEL button 7 To actually apply all settings changed in the Internet Settings display press the 7 A W SAVE button To cancel press the 8 A V CANCEL button Browser INTERNET SETTING BROWSER LAN HIRELESS owt Encode 1 Western European e Home page nternet Direct Homepage Set current page as Home C i Restore default Home a 91 Show images Time zone 1 U K time GMT CONTROL MENU Q Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser Home page Shows and allows editing the title of the web page registered as the Home page e Set current page as Home For details refer to Changing the Home Page on page 181 Restore default Home Restores the home page setting Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on Image data is not shown when this is set to off Q Time zone This determines the time setting for the browser Make a written note of the settings here in case you have to enter them again 1 203 2 16 71 70 203 216 70 70 192 168 0 59 Use DHCP
23. page 36 Turning parts channels of the Song On Off Ji iae cite ette eet tet tente tana ivii ees o eae kon o hides aei N dun page 146 Adjusting the balance between the Song and keyboard sss eee e page 144 Playing Styles ies cevessevas page 106 Playing Preset Siles yros iisas page 46 Turning parts channels of the Style On Off Ji eiecit ett intet ternario tne d i he ehh epe dos page 108 Adjusting the balance between the Style and keyboard sss page 111 amp Playing the Multi PAAS MR page 52 Playing the Keyboard Selecting a Voice RIGHITT and playing the Keyboard tr rto eniai page 84 Playing two or three Voices simultaneously seii eese toes ont tota rho egeo co tpe Un epe ou erbe eue eub napanis page 85 Playing different Voices with the left and right hands terrere treten thon khe tuni ibas one pe db da page 86 Playing the drum percusston VOICES c oos to eere hen eto td tua e Dn ones ia eiie R ox Eye Co epe XAR SERE ES RUE el cupio pe keen page 83 Super Articulation VOICES PSR 5900 idee Seen eoo disainereid e PEE eeen eet a pa ep dene page 83 s Mega VOICES nsi ir ni eom eid tis ste ipte me esp OKERREAN eee pedro eet Ee aedi ep dba ces uds page 83 Setting the
24. P CHANNEL ON OFF DIRECT ACCESS 2 Press the 1 V 8 V buttons to turn the channels on or off To listen to only one instrument by itself hold down the appropriate but ton for the channel to set the channel to SOLO To cancel SOLO simply press the appropriate channel button again Playing the chords in free tempo without Style playback You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the Style by setting ACMP to on see page 109 Stop Accompaniment and SYNC START to off For example if MULTI FINGER is selected page 107 you can perform with your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one finger Setting the fade in out time You can set the time of the fade in and fade out pages 48 49 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 1 A FADE IN OUT HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters by using the 3 A W 5 A V buttons FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in or go from minimum to maximum un D gt Es A c Q cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B Oo e 9 ob c uu FADE OUT Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out or go TIME from maximum to minimum FADE OUT Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out HOLD TIME 108
25. PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Using Creating and Editing Voices Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing Voices eerte ree EIER IEEE page 30 enina EESAN ES eee e eic MR O page 30 Using the Piteh Bend Wheel ecce eL page 33 Weimerthe Mocuilati an wheel E E page 33 Uima theMettonome sce ete eee page 34 Voice Effects e eeneeneem emere S page 53 ERITEYETETY Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name S Articulation The Super Articulation voices sound remarkably authentic and natural PSR S900 featuring the unique performance characteristics of each instrument for example guitar scratching sounds or the legato phrasing of wind instruments They provide many of the same benefits as the MegaVoices see below but with greater playability and expressive control in real time To effectively play these natural sounds in performance of certain voices you may need to use the pedal or footswitch For details on how to best play each voice call up the Information window pressing the 7 A button in the Voice Selection display Mega Voice The Mega Voices are not intended to be played from the keyboard They Mega Voices Compatibility are primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data such Mega Voices are not compatible as songs and styles Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular with other models Any song have been created as Me
26. The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name Pro These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player As a result your chord changes and colorful harmo nies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes as well as special riffs with chord changes with the Main sections These have been programmed to add spice and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres Keep in mind however that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate or even harmonically correct for all songs and for all chord playing In some cases for example playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a jazzy seventh chord or playing an on bass chord may result in inappropriate or unex pected accompaniment Selecting a Chord Fingering Type Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard There are seven types of fingerings Call up the operation display FUNCTION C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB 4 CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the 1 A V 3 A V buttons to select a fingering STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING
27. USER2 USER3 USER4 USERS USERG USER USERS USERS USER10 14 5 Press the I SAVE button to save the effect page 73 When recalling the saved effect use the same procedure as in step 8 EQ Equalizer Equalizer also called EQ is a sound processor that divides the frequency spec trum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speak ers to match the special character of the room For example you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too boomy or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively dead and free of echoes The instrument possesses a high grade five band digital EQ With this function a final effect tone control can be added to the output of your instrument You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the EQ display You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the fre quency bands and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs Bandwidth Gain also called Shape or Q Freq Frequency Sbands gt WLOWMID MID HIG MID HIGH EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5 Bi Select a Preset EQ type 3 Same operation as in the Basic Proc
28. You can drop files into a folder c 98 5 T S 2 O 3 wn amp ea Folder Folder Icon LE un e LPs cse nit VOICESET INFO LLLI CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER DENO 70 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display File Selection Display Basic Operation VOICE RIGHTI U aaa past EA USBI lan a B WarmGrand IN Di BrightPiano z MidiGrand la Harpsichord Oct Pianol Ea GrandHarpsi a Oct Piano2 Ss R HonkyTonk CPs0 4 m INFO uP HANE CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER DENO Select the tab containing the desired file by using the TAB lt gt buttons Select the page containing the desired file by using the 1 A 7 A buttons Select the file There are two ways to do so e Press one of the A J buttons Select the file by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER but ton to execute Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder press the 8 A UP button Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate fol
29. _ HARMONICA HO REVOICE H STEEL GUITAR LIVE STEEL GIR p _ sazz surar COOL JAZZ GIR CLEAN GUITAR COOL CLEAN GIR A J LJ E REUOICE TO LIVE GRAND PHO LIVE HARM GRND HO REVOICE VOICE MANE p kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c wo 2 6 Use the 4A W 6 A V buttons to select the Voice for replacing the XG selected in step 5 Several different Revoice settings are available by using the F I J but tons for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one action ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the high quality Voices of the PSR S900 S700 BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suit able for playing back the song ALL NO REVOICE All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices 7 Press the 8 A OK button to apply your Revoice settings To cancel the Revoice operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 8 In the VOL VOICE tab display press the F button to set SONG AUTO REVOICE to ON 94 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Effect Type E Selecting an Effect type 1 3 Same operation as in the Basic Procedure on page 91 In step 2 select the EFFECT tab 4 Press the F TYPE button to call up the Effect Type selection display MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART
30. f OWNER 2 Press the 44 V 5 A V buttons to select the desired language UTILITY OWHER LANGUAGE ENGLISH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rl sspe a G o E 2 Press the DEMO button to start the Demos Demos will play back continuously until stopped eae D 3 Press the EXIT button to stop the Demo playback When the Demo stops the display returns to the MAIN display 24 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Showing Specific Demo Topics Press the 7 A V 8A V buttons in the Demo display to call up the specific Demo menu To return back to the previous display press the J Play Overview Demo but me ton 1 2 3 4 5 aa a a a E 7 8 A aja 2 Press one of the A H buttons to show a specific Demo mea HS gt c C73 s eoundlShowcase IntemmetjSenvicesM a m fo c Showcase Functionsi amp jreaturesi n C73 Jinteractivereatures i ea CI E 4 When the Demo has more than on screen vij v2 vs vaj vs vej wr vsj Press 1 A V 8 A V but tons corresponding to the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 screen number Y v v fv vl Oey vgl Ev 3 Press the EXIT button to exit from the Demos PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 25 26 Operations in Basic Displays To start with you should know a little about the basic displays
31. PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 21 c S 5 o 3 me o 5 c Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks An optional floppy disk drive UD FDO01 can be connected to this instrument It lets you save original data you ve cre ated on the instrument to floppy disk and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care Follow the important precautions below Floppy Disk Compatibility e 3 5 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used Formatting a Floppy Disk If you find that you are unable to use new blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices you may need to format them For details on how to format a disk see page 72 Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting Make sure to check before hand whether or not the disk contains important data 2 NOTE Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be usable as is on other devices Inserting Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward towards the disk slot Carefully insert the disk into the slot slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out 2 NOTE Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive Other objects may cause damage to the d
32. Plug an optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off The footswitch functions like the damper pedal on a piano press for sustain release for normal sound FOOT PEDAL 2 jack PSR S900 Plug an optional Yamaha Footswitch FC4 or FC5 into this jack and use it to control the Super Articu lation Voices page 83 PSR S700 Plug an optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller into this jack and use it to change the volume as you play the instrument expression function FOOT PEDAL Foot Pedals A Footswitch FC4 optional Footswitch FC5 optional Foot Controller FC7 optional N CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is off Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller AUX PEDAL jack Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal CONTROLLER FOOT PEDAL 23320 LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 Fis Fa raa The functions assigned by default to the connected foot switch or foot controller can be changed for example letting you use the footswitch to start stop Style play back or use the foot controller to produce pitch bends Call up the operation display FUNCTION D CONTROLLER TAB lt 4 gt FOOT PEDAL 2 Use the A B buttons to select one of the two foot pedals to which the function is to be assigned 3 Use the 1 A W button to select the functions to be assigned to the pedal specified in step
33. Registration Sequence As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings without having to take your hands from the keyboard The convenient Registration Sequence func tion lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify by simply using the TAB 44 gt buttons or the pedal as you play Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence page 136 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION E REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET gt TAB lt 4 PB REGISTRATION SEQUENCE REGISTRATION SEQUENCE 3 310 400 E30 REGISTRATION BRHK NewBank SEQUENCE ENABLE eris wn 2 2 Z 9 Nn T 5 a E o wn 23 V o0 T O D a ae c S o0 c 9 L 2 o I ce REGIST pav CE PEDAL2 OFF REGIST PEDALI PEDRL2 133 na ndr SEQUENCE DAT oo SI TOP NEXT BANK CURSOR 3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings specify here how the pedal will be used to advance or to reverse through the sequence Use the C button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence Use the D button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence 138 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual On Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Use the E button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence SEQUENCE END
34. STOP stetisse Pressing the TAB f button or the advance pedal has no effect The sequence is stopped TOP tret The sequence starts again at the beginning NEXT BANK The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder Program the Sequence order The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REG ISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons on the panel Program the Sequence order from left to right Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 button on the panel then press the 6 A V INSERT button to input the number Replacing the number Press the 5 A W REPLACE button to replace the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number Deleting the number Press the 7 A W DELETE button to delete the number at the cursor position Deleting all numbers Press the 8 A W CLEAR button to delete all numbers in the sequence Press the F button to turn the Registration Sequence function on Press the DIRECT ACCESS button then the EXIT button to return to the Main display and confirm whether the Registration Memory num bers are called up according to the sequence programmed above e Use the TAB gt button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the order of the sequence or use the TAB lt 4 button to call them up in reverse order The TAB 44 gt buttons can only be used for
35. The Search 1 display appears showing the results of the search To cancel searching press the 8 V CANCEL button Searching other music genres When you want to search other music genres press the 6 W SEARCH 2 button in the Music Finder display The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display Calling up the panel settings to match the style REPERTOIRE When searching by style name the same search result is obtained even if the search is done by using the Repertoire function See page 56 for details Creating a Set of Favorite Records As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder records you may want to create a folder of favorite records so you can quickly call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance Select the desired record from the Music Finder display 2 Press the H ADD TO FAVORITE button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display MUSIC FINDER RE FAVORITE SEARCH1 SEARCH 2 SORTBY A 0 P 30 sc EL SORT ORDER ASCENDING A Bridge To Cross Troub PowerBallad ADD TO C ABright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 76 Ms E A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad 88 D A Day s Difference 70 sTYTheme 126 OFF oaol Feeling Of Love Tonig MovieBallad A Fire Lighter 8 FOESUED E A Misty Ballad 7o GEIL TT HUMBER OF RECORDS
36. The instrument does not necessarily support all commer cially available USB storage devices Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase Before purchasing USB storage devices please consult your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor see list at end of the Owner s Man ual for advice or visit the following web page http music yamaha com homekeyboard Bi Although CD R RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument they cannot be used for saving data Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted a message may appear prompting you to format the device media If so execute the Format operation N CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data Proceed with caution espe cially when connecting multiple USB storage medias the Save Copy and Delete operations N CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on off to the USB storage device or connecting disconnecting the cable too often Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument freezing or hanging up While the instru ment is accessing data such as in the Save Copy and Delete operations do NOT unplug the USB cable do NOT remove the media from the device and do NOT turn the power off to either device Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices
37. bers half size marks half size Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired position Press the 2A V 6 A V and 7A buttons corresponding to the character you wish to enter Entering letters numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or pressing one of the character entry buttons Alternately you can wait for a short time and the characters will be entered automatically For details on entering characters refer to the following section step 4 PO NewFolder 81 nBc2 DEF eura IKLS woe pans ruva uxvzs 0 swbou DELETE GANGEN Several different characters are assigned to each button and the characters change each time you press the button A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab Folder directories for the USER tab display In the USER tab display folder directories can contain up to four levels The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 730 360 for the PSR S700 but this may differ depending on the length of the file names The maximum number of files folders which can be stored in a folder in the USER tab is 250 uoleiado aiseg Depending on the display for character entry you are working in some types of characters can not be entered Even if you select Japanese as the Language when you enter the characters in the lyrics editing display page 170 the Internet Setting display page 178 or website the
38. esesseen ene page 59 Singing with the Guide functions and Song playback ssssssssssesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeennenennen enne page 145 Using the Talk Setting iiser M page 191 e Matching the Song Transpose setting to a comfortable singing pitch sssssseee page 61 e Matching the Keyboard Transpose setting to a comfortable singing pitch ssssssssee page 87 Live performance tips and techniques e Assigning specific panel operations functions for foot control ssessssssssesseeeeenenee ee page 195 e Calling up Registration Memory numbers in custom set order sess Registration Sequence page 138 Using a foot pedal to change Registration Memory numbers ssssssesssseeeeeeeeeenee eene page 195 s Using the Fade MOUT senyaniie et ere erm eo ir e RR REC ERROR UE e ER Res oret e ERI Sperre rupe pages 48 49 Group performance tips and techniques e Independently transposing the Song and keyboard pitch to match your singing range sse page 59 e Tuning the overall sound of the PSR S900 S700 to match other instruments sssssssseseeee page 87 Synchronizing the PSR S900 S700 to other MIDI instruments sevse sirieus iseseisana as page 207 Other Tips Registering your name to the PSR S900 5700 irri prit err t P pe epe Pene EEEL A tke Fe Ee pee eg EES page 21 e Importing custom icons fo
39. oo OO O o THAT THREE Erara uss MIDI FOOT PEDAL TO DEVICE TO Host VIDEO OUT PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 13 c S 5 o 3 me o 5 c 14 Panel Controls YAMAHA YAMAHA STANDBY ON ISTANDBY ONJSWItC certo re tme pere p 17 VOLUME MASTER VOLUME dial eee P 17 WHEEL Q PITCH BEND whe lssisi iaeiei airesm nanii P33 MODULATION wheel eeeeeennn p 33 PHONES O IPHONES iiia o oet ba t Re e Reb EE EE t rete pE EE EK P 18 DEMO O DEMON DUO iter eet n trees P 24 MIC MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button PSR S900 P 59 SONG SELECT buttOti ioter rer tn rtt ert rete eek stii P 36 Q SCORE buttOri u eie aree a P 39 LYRICS TEXT button PSR S900 eeenne P 58 LYRICS button PSR S700 2 ce tr retineo a P 58 QD REPEAT button ccc ccccssccccssscceesseceessseceesseecessaees P 42 B GUIDE b ttorn otc net potter aai P 40 B EXTRA TR b tton cierre ttr rt ert neri enne P 147 D TR 2 DUEtOTI asi er ettet ott E cetacean dies P 42 B ITRI DUON cuori eret eere Lettre teres P 40 D IRECIDUIOD cheron RE Cre lawn PR
40. u 8 gt o0 c uu Connecting external MIDI devices MIDI terminals Connecting a Computer or USB Device Connecting External MIDI Devices MIDI terminals Use the built in MIDI terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effec tively use it refer to the following sections Whatis MIDI sitienti page 201 e What You Can Do With MIDI page 203 MIDI Settirigs eei eie ens page 204 Connecting to a computer USB device and the Internet USB LAN TO DEVICE TO HOST E d Te Connecting a Computer O MIDI and Q USB TO HOST terminals By connecting a computer to the USB TO HOST or MIDI terminals you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI and take advan tage of sophisticated computer music programs Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver The instructions below explain how to connect and use the terminals 2 NOTE If you are using a computer that has a USB interface we recom mend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB rather than by MIDI 2 NOTE Driver A driver is software that provides a data transfer interface between the
41. 128 96 392 voices 480 XG voices 317 voices 480 XG voices Voice Selection 19 Drum SFX Kits GM2 GS 16 Drum SFX Kits GM2 GS voices for GS Song playback voices for GS Song playback S Articulation Voice 23 m Mega Voice 15 10 Voice Live Voice 20 14 Cool Voice 26 18 Sweet Voice 22 11 Organ Flutes Voice 10 10 Regular Voice 276 254 Voice Editing Voice Set YES Tm Reverb Chorus DSP 6 Microphone 1 Reverb 34 Preset 3 User Revers ohorus DSP E e n Effect Types DSP 2 4 106 Preset 10 User Master EQ 5 Preset 2 User Part EQ 28 Parts Vocal Harmony 60 Preset 10 User Accompaniment Styles 305 205 Pro Styles 281 193 Session Styles 24 12 Mega Voice Style YES Fingering Single Finger los Fingered On Bass Multi Finger Al Fingered Accompani ull Keyboard Al Full Keyboard ment Style Style Creator YES OTS One Touch Setting 4 for each Style OTS Link YES Music Finder Edit YES RAM Capacity 120 KB Preset Songs 5 samples Guide Follow e ed Follow Lights Any Key Karao Key Song Performance assistant technology YES Recording Quick Recording Multi Recording Step Recording Song Editing Record Channels 16 RAM Capacity 300 KB USB Audio Recorder YES Multi Pad Preset 4 Pads X 95 Banks 4 Pads X 80 Banks tornet DirectConhodti n LAN Port Wireless Game Adaptor via LAN Port External Adaptor via USB to DEVICE PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 215 xipuaddy PSR S900 PSR S700
42. 2 Press the 5 V DELETE button The pop up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display SD setect rites folders 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file folder To cancel the selection press the same A J button again E Selecting all files folders Press the 6 V ALL button to select all files folders indicated on the cur rent display including the other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 W ALL OFF button again 4 Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Delete operation press the 8 V CANCEL button 5 Follow the on display instructions bic E Delete the file folder Deleting all data in a USB YES AIL d teroase Delete all selected files folders storage device at once INO EIS Leave the file folder as is without deleting Formatting a USB storage device completely erases all data on the CANCEL siint Cancel the Delete operation USB storage device page 72 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 75 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Renaming Files Folders This operation lets you rename files folders Call up the display containing the file folder you want to rename 2 Press the 1 V NAME button The pop up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display MAME Select a file or folder 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desire
43. Changing Pitch Transpose Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down in semitones Transposing during performance You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instru ment by pressing the TRANSPOSE buttons Transposing before performance Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display You can set the transposition for the keyboard pitch KBD song playback SONG or overall sound of the instrument MASTER respectively 1 Call up the operation display MIXING CONSOLE TAB lt 4 TUNE 2 Use the 1 A V 3 A V buttons to set the transposition Fine tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument useful when you play the Please note that the Tune func PSR S900 S700 along with other instruments or CD music tion does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices Call up the operation display FUNCTION A MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE TAB lt 4 gt MASTER s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs TUNE 2 Use the 4A V 5 A V buttons to set the tuning Hz Hertz Press the 4 or 5 s A and W buttons simultaneously to reset the value to This unit of measurement refers the factory setting of 440 0 Hz to the fegueney of asounid and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical period
44. D J uU LGD CONTRAST KOOD ssiri ee ee Fe o ea P 19 A J buttons eese eene P 26 BALANCE butto tee scstscc Asse oae eio eoe erre ean o run P 41 MIXING CONSOLE button CHANNEL ON OFF button eene P 108 146 DIRECT ACCESS button ceeeseeeennn P 67 D 1 A V 8 A V buttons esee P 26 8 TAB lt 4 gt buttons eesseeeeenn P 27 FUNCTION button ctore Ihe tene th Po tano P 28 USB DUO Ier ordei rore tete Den P 71 INTERNET button cessseseseeeeenn nennen P 171 EXIT DUO 4er rrt t v rete Rs P 27 OMAA ENTRY dial i reca tete eh Ged ke Erogo P 71 O ENTER DUttOhi ciii ieri reor E re Hr eoe RIA P 71 MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER button cessere p 55 PART PART SELECT PART ON OFF buttons P 84 VOICE VOICE DUttONS roh ror XO TOO EROS P 30 REGISTRATION MEMORY REGIST BANK buttons esee P 136 FREEZE button P 138 MEMORY DUttOn sssini P 135 e T 2 8 Buttons ce o e e eet e rore o ete P 135 MULTI PAD CONTROL amp vo oeoooo0eo SEL EGA DUO iride i Erb S E ces Pieri deut P 134 TFTA buttons air or trt et ener P 134 STOPI Hutto siii doereotin teh re ier o ode reo Er cobi chao Drs P 132 E TOUCH SETTING TAMI buttons rastro es cn e t te tenet co P 51 ICE CONTROL HARMONY ECHO but
45. Edit This is normal BASS PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles cannot be edited Registration memory The Song Style registered to the Registration Mem ory cannot be called up e If the registered Song Style is contained on USB storage device and the USB storage device is not connected to the instrument the Song Style cannot be called up Con nect the appropriate USB storage device containing the Song Style data The order for calling up Registration Memory settings is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting display The bank containing the Registration has not been selected Select the appropriate bank page 136 When using the Freeze function of the Registration Memory the On Off setting of the Left Part does not change even when changing the Registration Mem ory setting The Left Part On Off setting is included in the Style group Remove the checkmark from STYLE in the Freeze setting display page 138 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 212 Even though a Registration Memory setting contain ing a User USB voice is selected the File Selection dis play shows a Preset Voice e This is normal even with the Preset Voice shown the actual sounding Voice is the selected User USB Voice When a User USB Voice is saved to the User USB drive the actual data is divided into two separate types 1 the source Preset Voice itself and 2 the parameter settings as set in the Voice Set When you recall a Regi
46. LEFT RIGHT RIGHT the Main display Hop LEFT 1 2 LOWER UPPER o o o ART ON OFF 3 Press one of the VOICE buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Left part VOICE orano Lo Jags Oo onew 50 ianmonica O prum kr o Jepiano O saxopHone Soe o orean FLUTES Co strinas 0 JAMES 0 Jprass o JSYNTH amp o Juser 4 Press the TAB lt button to select the PRESET display VOICE LEFT wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c uu 2 USER USBI Sweet a mme lan TuttiAccordion l Accordion l SmallAccordion Imm SoftAccordion rs BallroomAcc m Bandoneon A Steirisch m ModernHarp Accordion MEZ A m VOICESET IMFO uP HANE cur COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE 0t DENO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a a fa A A A A Y v v v Y Y Y Y 5 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Voice 6 Play the keyboard emul eg Left parton ort 7 Press the PART ON OFF LEFT button again to turn it off You can use a pedal to switch the Left part on off when the Left part is appropriately assigned page 195 This is useful for turn ing the Left part on and off while you play Specifying the split point the border between the right and left hand range See page 110 86 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual
47. Press the REGIST BANK and buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display N CAUTION Keep in mind that all Registra 2 Press the 6 V button to save the Bank file page 73 tion Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks unless you ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 139 un o0 c o un o0 c z UO LL TC c o0 c pz oO I 9 V ob c T x Using Creating and Editing Songs Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Han dling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc on page 23 Before using a floppy disk and the disk slot be sure to read Handling floppy disks on page 22 Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws Copying com mercially available data is strictly prohibited except for your own personal use See page 203 for information on the types of Song data that can be played on the instrument Reference to Quick Guide Pages PracticingiwitlithelPresetSongsp tec page 36 Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing page 36 Displaying Music Notation Score esee eere eee page 39 Muting the Right or Left hand Part Viewing the Score page 40 Practicing by Using the Repeat Playback Function page 42 Re cotdingYoucPetermallce voee tO EU page 43 Singing Along with So
48. The PSR S900 also features convenient vocal prac tice tools that automatically adjust the timing of Song playback to match your vocal performance when singing into a connected microphone Selecting the Guide Function Type Call up the setting display FUNCTION B SONG SETTING Use the A B buttons to select the desired Guide function type The following types are available Follow Lishts GUIDE ODE FUNCTI 15 fin Ke Sons Playback Pauses and waits Karao Ke for you to play the correct note Playback continues when E Vocal CueTIME the correct note is played HR n REPEAT C c aa SINGLE ALL RANDON D oN 133 M CHANNEL SETTING E RUTO LYRICS QUICK TRAGK2 TRAGK1 CH SET LANGUAGE STRRT c P R T am OFF AUTO 1 wie INTERHATIONRL SWT NS OM 2 2 OFF JAPANESE OFF _ jE 3 Select a song call up the Score display by pressing the SCORE but ton then play the keyboard Saving the Guide settings in the SONG SETTING display You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data page 166 For Songs to which Guide settings have been saved the Guide function will be auto matically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 145 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions For Keyboard Performance Follow Lights When this is selected Song playback pauses
49. YAMAHA pS Pee SS aan Seal NF J PSR E PsR gt Z L3U03 OWNER S MATES SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply adapter DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual on the name plate or specifically recom mended by Yamaha WARNING Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind The use of an extension cord is not recommended If you must use an extension cord the minimum wire size for a 25 cord or less is 18 AWG NOTE The smaller the AWG number the larger the current han dling capacity For longer extension cords consult a local electrician This product should be used only with the components supplied or a cart rack or stand that is recommended by Yamaha If a cart etc is used please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom pany the accessory product SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing However Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units This product either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head phones or speaker s may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss DO NOT operat
50. hiragana Press the 7 W DELETE button Clearing the reversed area at once Press the 8 V CANCEL button Entering the hiragana itself without converting it Press the 8 A OK button Canceling the character entering operation Press the 8 W CANCEL button 78 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Restoring the Factory programmed System he operation of restoring the factory programmed settings While holding the C6 key right most key on the keyboard turn the POWER but does not affect the Internet Set ton ON tings To reset the Internet Set This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore tings refer to page 182 operation explained in step 2 of the following section Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Independently by Item g N CAUTION o 1 This operation deletes all your m Call up the operation display original data for the respec El FUNCTION JJ UTILITY TAB lt gt SYSTEM RESET tive item MIDI SETUP USER S8 EFFECT MUSIC FINDER and 2 Select items by pressing the 1 A V 3 A V buttons FILES amp FOLDERS SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings Refer to the Data List for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup The Data List is available
51. indicate the chords based on the previously played chord etc 9th 11th and 13th chords cannot be played This type is available only for Style playback Artificial Intelligence sajAg jueuirueduioo5y ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style Try to play the melody along with just the rhythm You can sound different rhythms for each Style Keep in mind however that not all Styles contain rhythm channels 1 Select a Style page 46 2 Press the ACMP to turn Auto Accompaniment off 3 Press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to play back the a the rhythm with Sync a You can also start the rhythm simply by playing the keyboard if Sync Start is enabled turn on the SYNC START button rhythm channels PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 107 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to stop the rhythm Turning channels of the Style on off A Style contains eight channels RHY1 Rhythm 1 PHR2 Phrase 2 You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on off as the Style plays 1 Press the CHANNEL ON OFF button to call up the CHANNEL ON OFF display When the STYLE tab is not selected press the CHANNEL ON OFF but ton again iG STYLE CHANNEL ON OFF RHY1 RHY2 BASS CHDI CHD2 PAD PHRI PHR2 On On On On On On ON ON
52. neously A blank Song New Song is called up for recording REC a i w H lt lt gt gt J LoJC JC L SYNC START The microphone input signal cannot be recorded here but can be recorded using the Audio Recording function page 63 Internal memory User tab displays capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 1 4MB PSR S900 560KB PSR S700 This capacity applies to all file types including Voice Style Song and Registration data files PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 147 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr Recording Your Performance to MIDI 2 Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance Below are some example settings you may want to try e Recording the RIGHT 2 and or LEFT parts The RIGHT 2 and or LEFT parts The RIGHT 2 and or LEFT keyboard parts should be turned on Select T onto separate the voice for each keyboard part RIGHT 2 LEFT by calling up the Voice l selection display page 85 page 86 e Recording Styles 1 Select a Style page 46 2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO buttons as necessary Using Registration Memory panel setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons page 135 3 While holding the SONG REC button press the SONG TRACK but tons to be recorded TR1 ry Recording your performance Press the SONG TR 1 button for the right hand part recording and or the SONG
53. position tab closed Write protect tab open protect position Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc This instrument features a built in USB TO DEVICE termi nal By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable you can save data you ve cre ated to the connected device as well as read data from the connected device Be sure to handle USB storage device with care Follow the important precautions below Using USB Storage Devices When connecting a USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc tion Before removing the media from the device make sure that the instrument is not accessing data such as in BEUH For more information about the handling of USB stor age device refer to the owner s manual of the USB stor age device Compatible USB storage devices Up to two USB storage devices such as a floppy disk drive hard disk drive CD ROM drive flash memory reader writer etc can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal If necessary use a USB hub The number of USB storage devices that can be used with musical instruments simultaneously even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used
54. to On set SYNC LOWER UPPER LOWER UPPER Co Gen Co Ce i Co 69 C9 C9 START to Off and select Off PART ON OFF i PART ON OFF for the Stop Accompaniment Split point i Split point parameter Y y libb IC ddl i Chord section for Style playback and Left Voice and Right 1 Harmony effect chord section for Right 2 Harmony effect Voices PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 89 wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o e L ob c uu 2 90 Selecting the Harmony Echo type PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Multi Assign Type Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right hand section of the keyboard to separate parts Voices Both of the keyboard part RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected the corresponding effect echo tremolo trill is applied to the note played in the right hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo regardless of the ACMP and the LEFT part on off sta tus Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously last two notes if more than two notes are held and it plays those notes alternately Harmony Echo Settings VOLUME This parameter is ava
55. 2 GM System Level 2 is a standard specification that enhances the original GM System Level 1 and improves Song data compatibility It provides for increased polyphony greater voice selection expanded voice parameters and integrated effect processing e XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future Song data recorded on the PSR S900 S700 using Voices in the XG category is XG compatible DOC Disk Orchestra Collection This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the PSR S900 S700 series instruments e Gs GS was developed by the Roland Corporation In the same way as Yamaha XG GS is a major enhance ment of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations as well as greater expres sive control over Voices and effects PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual MIDI Settings In this section you can make MIDI related settings for the instrument The PSR S900 S700 gives you a set of ten pre programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particu lar MIDI application or external device Also you can edit the pre programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the U
56. 2 Details on the pedal functions are listed below 4 Use the 2A W 8 A V buttons to set the details of the selected functions The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3 Details on the parameters are given on page 196 5 Check that the desired function is controllable with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal Bi When you use the pedals to switch Registration Memory settings page 138 these settings are invalid Set the polarity of the pedal Pedal on off operation may differ depending on the partic ular pedal you ve connected to the instrument For exam ple pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on while pressing a different make brand of pedal may turn the function off If necessary use this set ting to reverse the control Press the I PEDAL POLAR ITY button to switch the polarity sool eg 14O YUM 1ueuinajsu INO SUISA PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 195 Other Devices ic z 5 c o E E J un 8 gt o0 c uu Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller FOOT PEDAL jack Details on the pedal functions are listed here For functions indicated with x use only the foot controller proper operation cannot be done with a footswitch Assignable Pedal Functions VOLUME Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain When you press and h
57. 2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd 8F 9F Dongsung Bldg 158 9 Samsung Dong Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Tel 080 004 0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 803 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 481 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Pap
58. 39 15 6 14 1 2 3 9 4 23 273 15 6 18 0 11 7 PURE MINOR o 33 6 39 15 6 14 1 2 3 31 3 2 3 14 1 15 6 18 0 11 7 PYTHAGOREAN O 14 1 3 9 6 3 7 8 23 117 23 15 6 63 3 9 102 MEAN TONE O 242 7 0 102 14 1 3 1 203 3 1 273 102 7 0 172 WERCKMEISTER o 10 2 7 8 6 3 102 2 3 117 3 9 7 8 11 7 3 9 7 8 KIRNBERGER o 102 7 0 63 14 1 2 3 102 3 1 7 8 102 3 9 11 7 ARABIC 1 0 0 500 O 0 0 0 0 o 500 O 0 ARABIC 2 0 0 0 o 500 O 0 0 0 0 o 50 0 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual In the display the rounded off value is shown Selecting the Harmony Echo type Selecting the Harmony Echo type You can select the desired Harmony Echo effect from a variety of types Turn the Harmony Echo button on Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt H HARMONY ECHO 3 Use the 1A V 3 A V buttons to select the Harmony Echo type Use the 4A V 8 A V buttons to select various Harmony Echo set tings page 90 The available settings differ depending on the Harmony Echo type Harmony Echo Types The Harmony Echo types are divided into the following groups depending on the particular effect applied Harmony Types TYPE These types apply the harmony STANDARD DUET N F right hand section of the key COUNTRY DUET COUNTRY TRIO BLOCK 4 HRY CLOSE1 4 HRY CLOSE2 board
59. 54 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song Music Finder oeer 55 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style Repertoire a a 9 eoe ne eee cs oversee METERS corse 56 Singing Along with Song Playback Karaoke or Your Own Performance eee 57 Connecting a Microphone PSR S900 only 57 Singing with the Lyrics Display Ee a 58 Convenient Functions for Karaoke 59 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your OvwnlDerformmamceleees a e a 61 Recording Your Performance as Audio USB Audio Recorder PSR S900 63 Recording Your Performance as Audio 63 Playing Back the Recorded Performance 65 Basic Operation Selecting Message Language 66 The Messages Shown in the Display 66 Instant Selection of the Displays Direct ACCESS iiccii cccsecssscccsesecsesseessssssssooscaseees 67 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection BUDE M 68 Main Display icone teorie coseieoteesessonasvees 68 File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation retro sten 69 File Folder Operations in the File Selection Display 72 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings 79 Restoring the Factory programmed System 79 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Independently by Item ertet 79 Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single F
60. 97 This affects the overall sound of the instrument EDIT For editing the EQ page 98 EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated boosted for each part EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated boosted for each part PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Song Auto Revoice This feature lets you use the high quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage with XG compatible song data When you play back any commercially available XG song data or that created on other instruments you can use Auto Revoice to automatically assign the specially created Voices of the PSR S900 S700 Live Cool etc instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type 3 Same operation as in the Basic Procedure on page 91 In step 2 select the VOL VOICE tab 4 Press the G SETUP button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP dis play 5 Use the 1 A V 3 A W buttons to select the Voice to be replaced MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART AUTO REVOICE SET UP VOICE NANE REUOICE TO GRAND PIANO LIVE GRAND PHO LJ A QpnrGHT PIANO LIVE BRITE PHO ck JEL PIANO 1 COOL E PIANO B lEL PIano 2 COOL SPRKLE STCK DRAHBAR ORGAN NO REUOICE ROCK ORGAN NO REUOICE C
61. Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off VIBRATO RATE VIBRATO DELAY Sets the speed of the vibrato effect Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced Higher values result in a longer delay PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound HARMONY 1 2 3 VOLUME Sets the volume of the first lowest second and third highest harmony notes HARMONY 1 2 3 PAN Specifies the stereo pan position of the first lowest second and third highest harmony notes Random The stereo position of the sound will change randomly when ever the keyboard is played This is effective when the Har mony mode page 190 is set to VOCODER or CHORDAL L63 gt R C L lt R63 A setting of L63 gt R pans the sound hard left while C is at cen ter and L lt R63 is at hard right HARMONY 1 2 3 DETUNE Detunes the first lowest second and third highest harmony notes by the specified number of cents PITCH TO NOTE When this is set to ON you can play the voices of the instru ment with your voice The instrument tracks the pitch of your voice and converts it to note data for the tone generator Keep in mind however that dynamic changes in your voice do not affect the volume of the tone gene
62. Assembly Instructions However we have determined through tests that the stand can be safely used for the instrument Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer Appendix 216 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual Index Numerics Al FULL KEYBOARD Any key ARABIG tee eins ASSEMBLY Auto Accompaniment Feature sssini AUTO REVOICE SETUP B Back Ground Lyrics BALANCE 21 BASIC nocte enum ipee ds BASS BOOKMARK Brightness x eec ohh Ote ORE ERR TIN EE BIOWSED s C Chain Playback CEUNININEL iii cates casis aote ie Dui erae Edita erro pra ert Lus CHANNEL ON OFF Characters 24er ose ertet eie t e e ine dde CHORD CHORD DETECT CHORD FINGERING Chord Tutor function eno CONFIG 1 Dico 5 DELETE Bim a e eor ar a RE RES Demo Voice DEMO button DIGITAL RECORDING button Direct Access DOC Disk Orchestra Collection BI Ae EDIT ge M Edit Bookmarks Edit Effect Edit EQ sess Edit Lyrics Edit Music Finder Edit OTS secet Dodo dence re ode teesds ees EE Bee DUM pam crees
63. Depth 64 normal Pa ene arces eae Depth 32 eA if is Meses half Received Velocity Actual KeyOn speed TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset with Depth set to 64 Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset 96 64 Offset 127 127 Offset 64 normal 127 B4 Hest uA A Offset 32 787 Received Velocity Actual KeyOn speed x Offset 0 127 v PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 6 Press the D COMPARE button to compare the sound of the edited Voice with the unedited Voice 7 Press the I SAVE button to save your edited Voice page 73 Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the Basic Procedure on page 99 The Voice Set parameters are organized into five different displays The parameters in each display are described separately below These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parame ters page 105 which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected COMMON VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity velocity sensitivity or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength DEPTH Determines the velocity sensitivity or how much the level of the voice changes in response to your playing strength velocity OFFSET Determines the am
64. HARMONY a o o J o sio NEW SONG I C SYNC STARTI FADE IN OUT OTS LINK AUTO FILL IN o ojo ACMP MAIN VARIATION BREA ENDING rit START STOP REGIST BANK SYNC SYNC STOP START FREEZE MEMORY 1 2 3 o o o fo o IS el i I Ha Ha HEHH I H HH FH STYLE CONTROL E Hi Ha n Vocal Harmony PSR S900 Add automatic vocal backing to your singing page 184 The amazing Vocal Harmony feature on the PSR 5900 automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that you sing into a microphone You can even change the gender of the harmony voices for example letting you add female backup to your own male voice or vice versa STYLE Playing a chord cally plays the a your backing ba Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment page 46 106 with your left hand automati uto accompaniment backing Select an accompaniment style such as pop jazz Latin etc and let the PORTATONE be nd DIGITAL RECORDING Record your performances page 43 147 With the powerful and easy to use song recording features you can record your own keyboard performances and create your own complete fully orchestrated compositions which you can t hen save to the USER drive or a USB storage device for future recall And since the re corded data is MIDI you can easily ed
65. HARMONY OM MIC SETTING G VOCAL HARMONY T m TETT TYPE H HIG SETTING i A VOCAL TALK HIC EFFECT HRRHON On ON L OrF J OFF j OFF 2 Press the H VOCAL HARMONY TYPE button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE selection display S O o Mi ce yo o c o lt o o 2 z c o0 c NT 184 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual co Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters Press one of the A J buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type to be edited VOCAL HARMONY TYPE USER L sictsdMenduer summemm amp 3 MixAcapQuar prem P3 P4 PS P6 DELETE SAVE Press the 8 V EDIT button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT display If you want to re select the Vocal Harmony type use the 1A V 2A V buttons Or you can re select the Vocal Harmony type by pressing the 8 A V RETURN button to return to the Vocal Harmony selection display VOCAL HARMONY EDIT EFFECT TYPE MenChoi r PRRRHETER URLUE EFFECT TYPE PARAHETER VALUE RETURNI gt E ETE Use the 3 A W 5 A V buttons to select the parameter page 186 you want to edit Set the value of the parameter selected above Press the I SAVE bu
66. Il m p gt E 9 Start Stop I B C STYLE CONTROL Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button is pressed Intro This is used for the beginning of the song Each preset Style features three different intros When the intro finished play ing accompaniment shifts to the Main section see Main in the During Style playback Press one of the INTRO I III buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to start Style playback Synchro Start This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard Press the SYNC START button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard to start Style playback Fade In The Fade In produces smooth fade ins when starting the Style Press the FADE IN OUT button when Style playback is stopped and press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to start Style playback Tap Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed Simply tap press release the TAP TEMPO button four times for a 4 4 time signature and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped o o A D BEX The particular drum sound and the velocity loudness of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt gt CONFIG 1 B 4 TAP PSR
67. List available at the Yamaha website See page 5 Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance Tap function The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the TAP TEMPO button twice at the desired tempo Specifying the split point the border between the right and left hand range See page 110 Turns touch response on off for the Style playback Style Touch See page 109 Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard Press the BALANCE button to call up the volume balance display 2 To adjust the Style volume press the 2 A W button To adjust the keyboard RIGHT 1 volume press the 6 A V button 3 Press the EXIT button to close the volume balance display Pattern Variation While you play you can automatically add specially created intros and endings as well as variations in the rhythm chord patterns for more dynamic professional sounding performances There are several different auto accompani ment pattern variations for each situation starting your performance during your performance and ending your per formance Try out the variations and combine them freely To Start Playing METRONOME TAP TEMPO TEMPO FADE IN OUT OTS LINK AUTO FILL IN ACMP INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP o o i o o o o o o o fol fe Il I Sr I I
68. Manual Style Creator E NOTE LIMIT This sets the note range highest and lowest notes for voices recorded to the style channels By judicious setting of this range you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible in other words that no notes outside the natural range are sounded e g high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range Example When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes gt CM C M ETE FM Notes played m E3 G3 C4 F3 G 3 C 4 F3 A3 C4 High Limit Low Limit Bi RTR Retrigger Rule These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes STOP The notes stop sounding PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord PITCH SHIFT TO The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root ROOT of the new chord RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord RETRIGGER TO The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next ROOT chord However the octave of the new note remains the same se Ais JuauUuedWosoy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 131 The Multi Pads un me E v Be To ensure that your repeated rhythmic phrase
69. Multi Pad Bank selection display then select a Bank to be edited on the USER drive SELECT 1 2 3 4 STOP o o o o MULTI PAD CONTROL MULTI PAD PRESET USER USBI A Oe SEAT 13 e FunkyGtr16Bt3 B le E Gtr16BtCut2 e DiscoGuitar e e E Gtr16BtCut3 se E Gtr16BtShfl1 pn le FunkyGtr16Bt1 e E Gtr 16BtShfl2 le FunkyGtr16Bt2 le E Gtr16BtPick MULTIPAD Pi MEZ P3 Z P5 P6 NEXT Up HANE CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER EDIT 2 Press the 8 V button to call up the MULTI PAD EDIT display then select a Pad to be edited by pressing any of the A B F and G buttons The number above the Pad name corresponds to the MULTI PAD 1 4 buttons un me zx 3 z o P 3 FunkyGtr16Bt3 1 FunkyGtr16Bt3 3 ra 4 FunkyGtr16Bt3 2 4 FunkyGtr16Bt3 4 B FunkyGtr16Bt3 COPY PASTE DELETE 3 Edit each of the Multi Pads as desired Naming Press the 1 W button then change the name of each Multi Pad page 76 Copying Press the 3 W button select the Multi Pad to be copied select the desti nation location then execute the Copy operation by pressing the 4 V button page 74 Deleting Press the 5 W button then delete the unnecessary Multi Pad page 75 134 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual The Registration Memory function allows you to save or register virtually all panel settings to a Regist
70. Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In Out points are not recorded over although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In Out timing You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers beforehand for automatic operation or manually execute the Punch In Out record ing by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the Basic Edit ing Operation on page 162 Use the 1A V 6 A V buttons to determine the settings for re recording see below 2 While holding the SONG REC button press the desired track but ton TR1 s l 3 Press the SONG gt IH PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point 4 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for N CAUTION saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another page 73 Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe B PUNCH IN settings cuting the Save operation page 73 NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG gt HB PLAY PAUSE button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally then starts overwrit
71. PB CHANNEL B SET UP 2 Use the 1A V 7 A V buttons to determine the settings to be automatically called up when the Song starts SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts RIGHT1 2 and LEFT and their on off status Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting This can be recorded at any point in a Song the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the top position of the Song SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON OFF setting LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display MIC SETTING Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings in the PSR S900 Mixing Console display page 91 3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the 8 A button 4 Press the D EXECUTE button to execute the SETUP recording oper ation 166 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI 5 Pressthe I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Editing Note or Chord Events CHORD 1 16 The explanations here appl
72. PITCH BEND Wheel operation BI NOTE The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI data MIDI Channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels Using these channels 1 16 the perfor mance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program MIDI operates on the same basic principle The trans mitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel MIDI Transmit Channel via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument If the receiving instru ment s MIDI channel MIDI Receive Channel matches the Transmit Channel the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument go ooo 0000 S s 5 9 5 ag amp o o s o ee AM MIDI Receive channel 2 201 Ww wee E FT MIDI Transmit channel 2 cable 2 NOTE The instrument s keyboard and internal tone generator are also co
73. Pitch Bend Range of the LEFT part 6 A V button Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the RIGHT1 part 7 A V button Sets the Pitch Bend Range of the RIGHT2 part Using the Modulation Wheel The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard This is applied to all the keyboard parts RIGHT 1 2 and LEFT Moving the MODULATION wheel down towards MIN decreases the depth of the effect while moving it up towards MAX increases it PITCH BEND MODULATION PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 33 BET To avoid accidently applying modulation make sure the MODULATION Wheel is set at MIN before you start playing The effects caused by using the MODULATION wheel will not be applied to the LEFT part when the Chord Fingering type is set to the one other than FULL KEYBOARD or Al FULL KEYBOARD with the ACMP and PART ON OFF LEFT turned on You can set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the key board part l call up the display FUNCTION gt D CONTROLLER gt TAB lt 4 gt KEYBOARD PANEL A B 2 MODULATION WHEEL 2 Set whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to each of the keyboard part by using the 5 A W 6 A W 7 A V button 5 A V button Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the LEFT part 6 A V button Sets whether the effe
74. Press the EXIT button to close the Tempo display 34 PSR S900 5700 Owner s Manual Set the Popup Display Time l call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 f 2 Selectthe B 2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME button and use the 7 A W 8 A V buttons to set the time E Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 1 B 2 METORONOME 2 Set the parameters by pressing the 2A W 7 A V buttons VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound SOUND Determines which sound is used for the met ronome Bell Officiis Conventional metronome sound with no bell Bell On Conventional metronome sound with bell TIME Determines the time signature of the metro SIGNATURE nome sound UTILITY CONFIG1 3 PARAHETE 4 TAP PERCUSSION HI HAT CLOSE VELOCITY 50 R LOCK t METRONOME SOUND TIM SIGHAT EE BELL OFF a BELL OW E URE 4 ry Sees FX FS PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 35 36 SONG LYRICS SELECT SCORE TEXT REPEAT GUIDE EXTRATR TR2 TR1 m L NEW SONG LSYNC START ooo C coo 00000 co oO oo o Oo opoo 00009 oc Goo Oooo 00000 089 00000 8
75. Registration Sequence when the Main display is called up When pedal operation has been set in step 3 you can use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order The pedal can be used for Reg istration Sequence no matter which display is called up except for the dis play in step 3 MAIN REGIST SEQ 12 TRAMSPOSE 0 UPPER OCTAYE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display letting you confirm the currently selected number N CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE display are auto matically saved to the instru ment when you exit from this display However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost Returning to the first Sequence in one action In the Main display press the TAB 44 and gt buttons simul taneously This cancels the cur rently selected Sequence number the box indicator at the top right goes out The first Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB lt 4 gt buttons or by pressing the pedal Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence SEQUENCE END are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence save the current Registration Memory Bank file sdnjas jaueg uiojsn Suij e2es pue Buas
76. The PSR S900 S700 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file contain ing lyric data is played SMF is the most common for mat used for MIDI sequence files The PSR S900 S700 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1 and records song data using SMF Format 0 9 Style File The Style File Format SFF combines all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment know how into a single unified format PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 203 seoi eg 1900 YUM 1ueuinujsu INO SUISA wn D gt o A m ES lt S O Es S z aa c o E 2 5 n E i 8 gt eo c uu 2 204 MIDI Settings Voice Allocation Format With MIDI Voices are assigned to specific numbers called program numbers The numbering standard order of voice allocation is referred to as the voice allocation format Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback The PSR 5900 5700 is compatible with the following formats NOTE Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above the data may still not be completely compatible depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording meth ods GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation for mats Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1 as is most commercially available software GM System Level
77. Voice Set Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices The PSR S900 S700 features a variety of lush dynamic organ Voices that you can call up with the ORGAN FLUTES button It also gives you the tools to create your own original organ sounds by using the Voice Set function Just as on a traditional organ you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the flute footages Basic Procedure Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited page 31 2 In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display press the 6 A FOOT AGE button to call up the VOICE SET ORGAN FLUTES display VOIGE CRIGHTI Organ Flutes Orsan Flutes A Sead RockingOrz F Orsan Flutes Orsan Flutes win 1 miim ive B BluesOrgan Percussive G Cc Orsan Flutes Orsan Flutes fn SixteenOne fn GospelOrg o Le e cq Organ Flutes Organ Flutes Sa EvenBars PadOrgan M D Organ Flutes Organ Flutes C E PopOrgan Send FullRanks E J L OrganFlutes Fane i FOOTAGE INFO UP SAVE FOLDER DEMO s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A A A A a a fa A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 3 Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the relevant setting display For information on the available parameters see the Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET ORGAN FLUTES displays on page 104 When selecting the E
78. a Voice is selected However you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below For example if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect set the HARMONY ECHO parameter to OFF in the display explained below You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION E REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET TAB lt gt VOICE SET 2 Use the A B buttons to select a keyboard part 3 Use the 4A W 7 A V buttons to enable disable automatic calling up of the settings ON or OFF independently for each parameter group Refer to the Data List for a list of parameters contained in each parameter group The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 105 n xD 2 Ee 22 c o E c o Qa E o o Q lt o Pg 2 o L o0 c UO Lu me c oO o0 c pz c o o L ob c 5 2 106 Using Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing Mary Had a Little Lamb with the Auto Accompaniment Feature 9 ere RR ORDEN PEE page 46 Eattenn Variati omae eee SEES page 48 Learning How to Play Indicate Chords for Style Playback page 50 Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style OMe OUCH SUING Sa e ou E E page 51 Style Characteristics
79. a jeras noor sc Jenonoaz zd mm g NIR ROOT FIXED F MIT BYPASS _ HIGH KEY F G MOTE LIMIT LOM C 2 HIGH 68 c 4 RTR PITCH SHIFT H a 54 E NTR HIT BASS J Le BYPASS MELODY ROOT TRANS CHORD on cHanneL LU MELODIC MINOR LOFF _ 128 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Style Creator 2 Use the 1 A V 2A V CHANNEL buttons to select the channel to be edited N CAUTION The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style 3 Use the 3 A W 8 A V buttons to edit the data or you turn the power off without executing the Save For details on editable parameters see below operation 4 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data Save the data in the Style Selection display page 73 Auditioning Your Style with a Specific Chord Normally in the Style Creator E PLAY ROOT CHORD you can hear your original Style These settings determine the original key of the source pattern i e the key used in process with the Source Pat when recording the pattern The default setting of CM7 with a Play Root of C terna However mere i d Way to hord T f M7 i t ticall lected wh th tda i hear it played by a specific chord and a C ord Type of M7 is automatically selected whenever the preset data is andiroot Todo this set NTRS deleted prior to recording a new Style
80. access special Internet websites for down loading music data page 171 li By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable you can save data you ve created to the connected device as well as read data from the connected device 2 NOTE About the USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction Explanations on the USB TO HOST terminal can be found in the previous section Connecting a Computer or USB Device Using USB Storage Devices This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB storage device and allows you to save data you ve cre ated to the connected device as well as read data from the connected device The following description gener ally explains about how to connect and use them Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Mem ory Floppy Disk etc on page 23 Connect the USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal with a standard USB cable 2 After that exit once from the selection display then return to the display or press the Tab switch buttons 4 and gt simultaneously from the selection display The USB tabs USB 1 USB 2 etc are automatically called up allo
81. are automatically called up when the Voice is selected FOOTAGE VOLUME ATTACK common parameters ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated Sine or Vintage ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes see EFFECT EQ DSP TYPE parameter on page 102 and the Voice Effect DSP page 102 is turned on this parameter has the same effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON OFF parameter VIBRATO ON OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels 1 low 2 mid or 3 high FOOTAGE 16 51 3 Which footage 16 or 5 1 3 is operated with the 1 A W button can be switched by pressing the D button 16 1 Determines the basic sound of the organ flutes The longer the pipe the lower the pitch of the sound Hence the 16 setting determines the low est pitched component of the Voice while the 1 setting determines the highest pitched component The higher the value of the setting the greater the volume of the corresponding footage Mixing various vol umes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds Voice Creating Voice Set VOLUME ATTACK VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes The longer the graphic bar the greater th
82. at the Yamaha website See page 5 MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab dis play to the original factory status USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types user master EQ types and user vocal harmony types PSR S900 created via the Mixing Console display to the original factory settings MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data all records to the original factory settings FILES amp FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the User tab display REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank The same can be done also by turning the POWER button ON while holding the B5 key right most B key on the keyboard UTILITY Pe CPEET eC PAR 33 118830 CIR aia SYSTEM RESET SYSTEM SETUP Ke FILES F The Factory Reset operation does not MIDI SETUP B reset certain parameters such as the FILES G Language setting and Owner Name To reset those load the preset System USER EFFECT c Setup file FILES H L MIDI SETUP C USER EFFECT C MUSIC FINDER O FILES amp FOLDERS C REGIST All User files and folders J WMARK are lost when Aon FILES amp FOLDERS is OFF selected andFactory Reset is executed FACTORY RESET MUSIC FINDER D EXECUTE CAUTION FILES U FACTORY RESET ISYSTEM SETUP
83. be used for Styles saved to a USB storage device To use the Repertoire function save the desired Style in USER tab 2 Press the 7 A REPERTOIRE button The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the Music Finder The list of the search results is shown on the SEARCH 2 display of the Music Finder N CAUTION When the result of searching the record in the SEARCH 2 display has already been shown the searched result is lost 3 Press the 2 A V 3 A V buttons to select the desired panel settings Sorting the records Press the F SORT BY button to sort the records MUSIC The record is sorted by song title The record is sorted by Style name The record is sorted by beat The record is sorted by tempo Changing the order of the records Press the G SORT ORDER button to change the order of the records ascending or descending PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Singing Along with Song Playback Karaoke or Your Own Performance If the selected song has lyric data you can have the lyrics shown in the display by playing back the song Sing the song while viewing the lyrics on the display Since the PSR S900 is equipped with the MIC LINE IN jack you can sing a song using a microphone MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY D SIGNAL YAMAHA 089 90008 Oooo 00000 Lit o ooo
84. by double clicking on one of the A J buttons VOICE RIGHT1 ive ET m A e Eu B WarmGrand r am BrizhtPiano a MidiGrand e 7j ep g Harpsichord oct Pianot I i g crandHarpsi mug Oct Piano2 i C3 am EES HonkyTonk W CP80 C3 H VOICESET INFO uP DENO 4 Play the keyboard Recalling your favorite Voices easily The instrument has a huge amount of high quality Voices covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds making it perfect for virtually every musical application However the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at first To easily recall your favorite Voice there are two methods Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the VOICE USER button 1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive Refer to page 74 for details on the copy operation 2 Press the Voice USER button to call up the Voice Selection display and press one of the A J buttons to select the desired Voice 9 Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEM ORY 1 8 buttons Refer to page 135 for details on Registration Memory operations PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 31 32 Playing the Voice Demos To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially
85. change the weight of the keyboard When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity set Touch to OFF for the corresponding parts by pressing the 5 V 7 W buttons When Touch is set to OFF you can specify the fixed volume level by press ing the 4 A W button The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices Using the Pitch Bend Wheel Use the PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up roll the wheel away from you or down roll the wheel toward you while playing the keyboard The Pitch Bend is applied to all the keyboard parts RIGHT 1 2 and LEFT The PITCH BEND wheel is self centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released PITCH BEND MODULATION BET If the Pitch Bend range is set to more than 1200 cents 1 octave via MIDI the pitch of some voices may not be raised or lowered completely The effects caused by using the PITCH BEND Wheel will not be applied to the LEFT part when the Chord Fingering type is set to the one other than FULL KEYBOARD or Al FULL KEYBOARD with the ACMP and PART ON OFF LEFT turned on The maximum pitch bend range can be changed via the following instructions Call up the display for setting the Pitch Bend Range MIXING CONSOLE TAB lt 4 gt TUNE H PITCH BEND RANGE 2 Set each of the Pitch Bend Range of the keyboard part by using the 5 A W 6 A W 7 A V button 5 A V button Sets the
86. computer s operating system and a connected hardware device You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the com puter and the instrument Refer to the separate Installation Guide page 4 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 198 This explanation is divided into two parts covering the two connections connection to the USB TO HOST terminal and connection to the MIDI terminal Connecting to the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the instrument to the computer via USB use a standard USB cable having the USB logo to connect the USB TO HOST terminal on the instrument to the USB terminal of the computer Then install the USB MIDI driver E iL lic USB cable Jl TINTE m Instrument 2 NOTE About the USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument USB TO HOST and USB TO DEVICE Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction Explanations on the USB TO DEVICE terminal follow in the next section ZN CAUTION Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST termi nal make sure to observe the following points Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data If the comput
87. conn bee ORO CIO IUD OI OI dp DIO EO page 184 Master EQ Ty POS emen agp seen Oo Ia e md n cas Rtas EI Ee trc ieu Ld rao D eo dd page 97 Using the LCD display Understanding and Using the Matin display 5 tete tr dere Ie o a PROPER H Reck EN page 26 Viewing the Song Lyrics om the LCD display eet tr ERO EE HOPES RO ONERE RE te E EEP ERE ES page 58 Viewing the Song Score on the LED display et tiere ro rie Ee Ee re e e e EN ERER ERE te ETES page 39 Viewing text files on the ECD display PSR S900 5 5 rrt tiii tret iN ERR Ettore eio EYE PIRE page 58 e Showing the display contents on a separate TV monitor PSR S900 isssssssssseeeeeee emen page 194 Playing Style chords with your left hand and melodies with your right Learning how to play specific chord types sssssseee Chord TUtOE serere bete page 50 e Learning how to play indicate chords for Style playback sssse Chord Fingering page 50 10 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual e Applying automatic harmony or echo to your right hand melodies Harmony Echo page 89 e Automatically changing the chords of the Multi Pads with your left hand play Chord Match nn page 53 Instantly selecting custom panel settings s Calling up ideal panel Setups e ze berc iore rrt o Ee eerie aee ORE Music Finder pages 55 1
88. dedecdaedecsdecees 191 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices io oodeivesieses nasci pdisenpias 193 Connecting Audio amp Video Devices 193 Using External Audio Devices for Playback Q OUTPUT jacks sen 193 Playing External Audio Devices with the Built in Speakers AUX IN jacks esse 193 Showing the Instrument s Display Contents on a Separate TV Monitor VIDEO OUT terminal PSR S900 194 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar O MIC LINE IN Jack PSR S900 194 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller FOOT PEDAL 1 2 jacks sees 194 Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal 195 Connecting External MIDI Devices Q MIDI terminals eee eee ceeeeeees 198 Connecting to a computer USB device and the Internet eene 198 Connecting a Computer Q MIDI and USB TO HOST terminals 198 Connecting to a USB type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device via the USB TO DEVICE terminal 199 Connecting to the Internet LAN Port 200 Whatis MIDI iicet teens 201 MIDI Settings inserti eee 204 Basic Operation eere einer nione noii orte hine 204 Pre Programmed MIDI Templates 206 MIDI System Settings eerte eerte 207 MIDI Transmit Settings seeeeeeeeee 207 MIDI Rece
89. etc on page 23 Connect the USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal 2 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display 3 Press the TAB lt 4 P buttons to select the USB tab USB1 USB2 corresponding to the USB storage device you inserted in Step 1 The indication USB1 USB2 will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices 4 Use the A J buttons to select a Song Bid You can also select a specified file in the USB storage device by pressing the USB button USB A SONG gt A D Playing Songs in sequence You can play all Songs in a folder continuously Select a Song in the desired folder Call up the operation display FUNCTION B SONG SETTING Press the H REPEAT MODE button to select ALL Press the SONG gt MM PLAY PAUSE button to start playback All Songs in the folder play back continuously in order Press the SONG lil STOP button to stop continuous playback To turn off the Song sequence playback press the H button to select OFF in the display in step 2 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 37 38 Boost the volume of the part to be practiced On the instrument a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels Specify the channel for practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel l selecta Song The method for selecting a Song is the same a
90. fal fal fa fa a fa fa fa Y Y Y v fv v y Y Press one of the A J buttons to select a Voice Play the keyboard Press the PART ON OFF RIGHT 2 button again to turn it off For the selected part the name of the currently selected Voice is highlighted reverse display in the Main display Quickly selecting Voices for Right 1 and 2 parts You can quickly select the Right 1 and 2 part Voices just from the Voice buttons Press and hold one Voice button then press another The Voice of the first pressed button is automatically set for the Right 1 part while the Voice of the second pressed but ton is set for the Right 2 part s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs Switching the Right 2 part on off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Right 2 part on off when the Right 2 part is appropriately assigned page 195 This is use ful for turning the Right 2 part on and off while you play PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 85 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left Parts You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left parts Make sure the PART ON OFF RIGHT 1 button is turned on For the selected part the name 2 Press the PART ON OFF LEFT button to turn it on of the currently selected Voice is highlighted reverse display in
91. folder on a USB storage device as soon as the device is con nected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt MEDIA 2 Press the 3A 4 A SONG AUTO OPEN button to select ON Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination etc MIXING CONSOLE You can set the mixing related parameters of a Song Refer to the section Adjust About the SONG CH 1 8 able items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE display on page 92 Call up the SONG CH 9 16 displays SONG CH 1 8 or SONG CH 9 16 display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in A LIE Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination MIXING CONSOLE on channels Separate settings can be made for each of the 16 chan page 91 Below are two operation examples nels in the MIXING CONSOLE display Adjust the parameters in the SONG CH 1 8orSONGCH Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel 9 16 display respectively Usu ally CH 1 is assigned to the TR 1 button CH 2 is assigned to the TR 2 button and CH 3 16 are assigned to the EXTRA TR button respectively Select a Song page 36 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button to call up the MIXING CON SOLE display Select the VOL VOICE tab by pressing the TAB lt gt buttons Press the MIXING CONSOLE button repeatedly to call up the display of SONG CH 1 8 or SONG CH 9 16 Press the J button to select the VOLUME Adjus
92. for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major minor chord such as Intros and Endings NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major minor chord such as Intros and Endings DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above augmented and dimin ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern E NTT BASS ON OFF The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note when the on bass chord is recognized by the instrument E HIGH KEY This sets the highest key upper octave limit of the note transposition for the chord root change Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave This setting is available only when the NTR param eter page 129 is set to Root Trans Example When the highest key is F Root changes wb CM C M soe FM FHM EE Notes played m C3 E3 G3 C 3 F3 G 3 F3 A3 C4 F 2 A 2 C 3 130 PSR S900 S700 Owner s
93. in Style playback The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type The chord type will be detected regardless of the ACMP or split point settings When several channels are simultaneously set to ON the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels MIDI Settings The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display ALLEAS L LEE CHORD DETECT n CHORD DETECT m ran Fa m Fa m im n DUO COHadoduuduuu ggg 123456 7989101112 13 1d 15 16 OFF MIDI UBB1O OO 000000000000 USB2 oo00o0o0o0o0o0ooooooooo ss Se 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Displaying the Voice Program Change Number Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice selection display This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB LSB val ues and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device You can set this in the display called up by the following operations FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu ON and OFF UTILITY eC ee CONFIG 2 isa CUM SOC ME 3 ELE 3 31 1 LCD BRIGHTHESS 20 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIOHS OPEH amp SELECT I Y DISPLAY DISPLAY Popup VOICE N MBER STYLE TEMPO DISPLAY TIME LOPENS SELECT on 3 0sec OPEN ONLY J EEENiSES OFF BET uq e The numbers displayed here start from Accordingly the actual MIDI progr
94. language COMFIG1 CONFIG2 OWHER NAHE 1 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ea LANGUAGE JAPANESE GERMAN FRENCH SPANISH ITALIAN Display Settings Adjusting the Contrast of the Display You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the LCD CONTRAST knob located to the left of the display TAB gt LCD CONTRAST MAIN TRANSPOSE 0 UPPER OCTAVE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 L F 2 d 4 4 120 SONG J JLive RIGHT1 umm Newsone If _JGrandPiano E rs Live RIGHTZ B 4A Strings G Cool LEFT i fim GalaxyEP T d d J 120 STYLE MULTI PAD Hi Straight8Pop BS E GtriGBtCutl D ul E BALANCE e 110 100 100 85 100 100 100 E 1 L m mm mL BALANCE FUNCTION SONG STYLE M PAD MIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 pnr CONSOLE usB _O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PART CANNE INTERNET A A A A n al fa DIRECT ACCESS Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EXIT PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 19 Adjusting the Brightness of the Display Adjust the brightness of the display Call up the operation display c FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB gt CONFIG 2 F 2 Press the 2
95. off without executing the save operation PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 127 se Ais jueuirueduioooy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis Style Creator Editing of Style File Format data is related only to note conver sion Editing the rhythm chan nels has no effect un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu Making Style File Format Settings PARAMETER Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File Format Source Pattern SOURCE ROOT Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern SOURCE CHORD Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern Chord change via the chord section of the keybaord Note Transposition NTR Note Transposition Rule applied to the Chord Root change NTT Note Transposition Table applied to the Chord Type change V Other Settings HIGH KEY Upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing caused by the Chord Root change NOTE LIMIT Note range in which the note is sounded RTR Retrigger Rules that determine how notes held through chord changes will be handled Output The Style File Format SFF combines all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment Style playback know how into a single unified format By using the Style Creator you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles The chart
96. operations Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display Press the H button to select Normal SONG CREATOR NevSongz STEP RECORD n 002 2 1300 End p zen GLE 0000 lt gt a aie AIE GB Ji E J I 2 Press the I button to select normal note type Co Press the 7 A V button to select the eighth note 4 While holding C3 key on the keyboard press the 7 A W button Do not release the C3 key yet Keep holding it while executing the following steps BAR BERT GLE 001 1 0960 uu 10 11 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard press the 7 A V button Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet Keep holding them while executing the following steps BAR BERT GLK t E CO Oa Meet Bs While holding the C3 E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard press the 7 A V button Do not release the C3 E3 and C3 keys yet Keep holding them while exe cuting the following steps errans 1 2 CE BA ape By While holding the C3 E3 G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard press the 7 A V button and successively press the 5 A V button After you press the 5 A W button release the keys BAR BERT CLK moe Moa uem Hy b
97. optical fiber cable Internet etc via a router or a modem equipped with a router For spe cific instructions on connecting as well as information on compatible LAN adap tors routers etc refer to the Yamaha website http music yamaha com homekeyboard Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connect ing the instrument since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself To use the Internet connection you will first need to subscribe to an Internet ser vice or provider Connection example 1 Connecting by cable using a modem without router Modem Router LAN cable No router capability Cable type LAN cable LAN port i i Here modem refers to an ADSL modem optical network unit ONU or cable modem Connection example 2 Connecting by cable using a modem with router ADSL modem LAN cable Router capability LAN cable LAN port io Modem Access point l Connection example 3 Wireless connection Iz p Wireless Game Adaptor uo 8 E i EIS AAA Here modem refers to an ADSL modem optical network unit ONU or cable modem
98. program in that it remembers certain information such as your user name and password so you don t have to re enter the information each time you visit the site DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses Download Transferring data over a network from a larger host system to a smaller client system s hard drive or other local storage device much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk For this instrument this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument Gateway A system which links different networks or systems and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet This phrase is also used to mean the front screen or top page of a website Internet A huge network made up of networks the Internet allows high speed data transfer among computers mobile phones and other devices IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network and indicating the device s location on the network LAN Short for Local Area Network this is a data transfer networ
99. received by the PSR S900 S700 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the Data List The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 What You Can Do With MIDI E Record your performance data 1 16 channels using the auto accompaniment features on an external sequencer or computer with sequencer software After recording edit the data with the sequencer then play it back on the instrument MIDI receive i 12 mibi n 4 mmi out H H ni n c i WEN o MIDI OUT MIDI IN f ii e me o Instrument MIDI transmit Computer or Sequencer When you want to use the instrument as an XG com patible multi timbral tone generator set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 16 to SONG in MIDI USB 1 in MIDI Receive page 208 What is MIDI E Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard MIDI receive e itemm ho MUN ipie oo i AACA ET I Instrument MIDI Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compati bility whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PSR S900 S700 and whether or not the PSR S900 S700 can playback commerciall
100. that appear in the Quick Guide There are three basic displays Main display See below File selection display page 27 Function display gt page 28 Operation of the Main Display The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument It is the same display that appears when the instrument is turned on You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from the Main display BIT About information in the Main display See page 68 A J buttons MAIN The AI DI buttons correspond to the TRANSPOSE 0 UPPER OCTAVE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 L F 2 1 settings indicated next to the buttons uaiNewsons EEE For example press the F button and ta RIGHTZ the Voice RIGHT 1 selection display eee will appear in the display E GalaxyEP 1A V 8 A V buttons tae Straisht8Pop The 1 A W 8 A V buttons corre hes CUM spond to the parameters which are indicated above the buttons For example pressing the 1 A but SONG STYLE Lal RIGHT1 ton will increase the Song page 36 volume DIRECT ACCESS and EXIT LEFT BRLRHCE 100 100 85 100 100 100 1 buttons Here s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other dis play Simply press the DIRECT ACCESS button then the EXIT button DIRECT ACCESS EXIT PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Operation of the File Selection Display In
101. the PSR S900 S700 are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instru ments PSR S900 This product is manufactured under license of U S Patents No 5231671 No 5301259 No 5428708 and No 5567901 of IVL Audio Inc The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co Ltd This product utilizes NF an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co Ltd NF is used with the patented LZW licensed from Unisys Co Ltd NF may not be separated from this product nor may it be sold lent or transferred in any way Also NF A GESS may not be reverse engineered reverse compiled reverse assembled or copied This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 5 Accessories Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration Accessory CD ROM for Windows Owner s Manual Accessory CD ROM for Windows Installation Guide Music Rest AC Power Adaptor PSR S900 PA 300B or an equivalent PSR S700 PA 301 or an equivalent May not be included depending on your particular area Please check with your Yamaha dealer PSR S900 The followings are the titles credits and copyright notices for two 2 of the songs pre installed in this instrument Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard
102. the site to be the Home page Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page 2 Press the 5 V SETTING button to call up the Internet Setting dis play 3 Press the TAB 4 buttons to select the BROWSER tab INTERNET SETTING BROWSER LAN WIRELESS OTHERS Encode Western European Home page i Yamaha Website 1 Set current page as Home Restore default Home Show images Time zone U K time GMT CONTROL NENU 4 Press the 1 V W button to select the setting Set current page as Home 5 Use the 2 A W 3 A V EDIT buttons to actually set the selected page as your new Home page 6 To return to the browser press the 7 A W SAVE button To cancel press the 8 A V CANCEL button jeujodu au O j eutQ 00Z5 006S 3Sd eui Sunoeuuo PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 181 Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet 182 Operations in the Special Website Sometimes cookies contain per sonal information PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Initializing Internet Settings The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the instrument Internet settings must be initialized separately as explained here Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the browser but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays
103. to be able to record playback normally Before using a USB storage device be sure to read Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc on page 23 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 63 64 USB JJ SONG VOICE RIGHT2 ug STYLE ta MULTI PAD USB AUDIO RECORDER A Press the E USB AUDIO RECORDER button to call up the recording display USB AUDIO RECORDER display Sit necessary press the E PROPERTY button to call up the Property display then check the information of the USB storage device USB i JJ SONG amp VOICE RIGHT2 F B u STYLE t MULTI PAD G USB AUDIO RECORDER Time 00 00 PRO RECORDING cm j ga m um em Do not take out the USB storage device 5 or turn off the instrument during 6 7 1 recording a3 nupiiON The following information is indicated on the PROPERTY display DRIVE NAME eee Number of the USB storage device USB 1 USB 2 etc e ALL SIZE utis ee i ute Size of USB storage device S EREEAAREA age pe anaa eas Available recording space on the USB storage device POSSIBLE TIME etienne Available time for recording Press the F OK EXIT button to close the PROPERTY display BIG The USB storage device of USB1 is selected as the recording des
104. to stop recording REC n u lt lt gt gt oo JU L NEW L SYNC START When recording is finished a message prompting you to save the recorded performance data appears To close the message press the EXIT button See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording Listen to your newly recorded performance Press the SONG gt Hi PLAY PAUSE button to play back the performance you just recorded REC u 4 Lo JI 15 JC 020 J L NEW SONG TART Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Multi Track Recording A Song consists of 16 separate channels With this method you can record data to each channel independently one by one Both Keyboard and Style parts can be recorded Press the SONG REC and SONG W STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song New Song is called up for recording Select Voices for recording the keyboard parts RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and or LEFT page 30 page 85 page 86 Select a Style and a Multi Pad Bank for recording also as necessary page 46 page 52 Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2 part to the channel 2 Press the PART SELECT RIGHT 2 button to call up the Voice selection display and select a Voice for the RIGHT 2 part Also be sure to turn the PART ON OFF RIGHT 2 button on REC LI H lt lt gt gt W B 2 l J
105. to the Internet Operations in the Special Website Editing Bookmarks From the Bookmark display you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list BOOKMARK BOOKMARK LIST Yamaha Website 1 PAGE TITLE Yamaha Website 1 CONTROL NENU mahal idleness Eel DELETE CLOSE Gj Q0 A Y Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list O9 View Opens the web page of the selected bookmark Add Used when saving a bookmark page 175 Q Move Changes the order of the bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark you wish to move then press the 4A V MOVE button The lower part of the display changes letting you select the new posi tion for the bookmark 2 Select the intended position by pressing the 1A V A V button 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the 7 A V EXECUTE button O Changing names Changes the name of the selected bookmark Pressing the 5 A W CHANGE but ton calls up the display for entering characters For details on entering characters see page 77 Q Delete Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list Q Close Closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 177 1 U19 U au 0 j eutQ 00Z5 006S 3Sd eui Sunoeuuo Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet 178
106. you play You can also use this with the style stopped with the Stop Accompaniment function Keep in mind that some Multi Pads are not affected by Chord Match SELECT i 2 3 A SIOR In this example the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back Try out other various chord types while playing the Multi Pads mmm mm Chord section MULTI PAD CONTROL Voice Effects The PSR S900 S700 features a sophisticated multi processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound This effect system can be turned on or off by using the following buttons HARMONY ECHO TOUCH SUSTAIN O00 These three effect systems are applied to the currently selected keyboard part RIGHT 1 2 or LEFT HARMONY ECHO The Harmony Echo types are applied to the right hand Voices Refer to Applying Harmony to Your Right hand Melody on page 54 TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off When OFF the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard SUSTAIN When this Sustain function is on all notes played on the keyboard RIGHT 1 2 parts only have a longer sustain You can also set the sustain depth page 102 MONO When this button is on the part s Voice is played monophonically only one note at a time Using the MONO mode lets you play single lead sounds such as brass instruments mo
107. 00 features a built in sequencer that lets you record performance data this recording equipment is unnecessary Instead your digi tal instrument allows you to both record and play back the data Tone generator Sequencer minm Keyboard performance MIDI data J However we also need a sound source to produce the audio which eventually comes from your speakers The tone generator of the instrument fills this function The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer playing back the song data using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds including that of a piano Looked at in another way the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano one plays the other Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument such as guitar or violin l2 NOTE Even though it is a single musical instrument the PSR S900 S700 can be thought of as containing several electronic components a controller a tone generator and a sequencer seol eg 1900 YUM 1ueunujsu INO SUISA PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 201 wn D gt o A m ES x S O Es p z c o E 2 5 n 8 gt eo c us 2 What is MIDI Finally we ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that
108. 00 only 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1 2 and 3 above Backup procedure 1 Song Style Multi Pad Registration Memory Bank and Voice Data 1 Insert connect the backup USB storage device destination 2 Call up the display containing the desired file to be copied Song Press the SONG SELECT button Style Press one of the STYLE buttons Multi Pad Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL SELECT button Registration Memory Bank Press the REGIST BANK and buttons simultaneously Voice Press one of the VOICE buttons 3 Select the USER tab by using the TAB lt 4 gt buttons 5 Data Backup Press the 3 V COPY button to copy the file folder The pop up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display Select files folders Press the 6 V ALL button to select all files folders indicated on the current dis play and all other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 V ALL OFF button again Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Copy operation press the 8 V CANCEL button uoneiodo oiseg Select the destination USB tab to which the file folder is to be copied by using the TAB lt gt buttons Press the 4 V PASTE button to paste the file folder If a message appears indicating data cannot be copied Protected Songs Pro
109. 1 Selects the channel 1 16 to be mixed All MIDI events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel SOURCE 2 Selects the channel 1 16 to be mixed Only note events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel In addi tion to the values 1 16 there is a COPY setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel If COPY is selected here the data from Source 1 is copied to the destination channel The original channel data is maintained DESTINATION Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed E CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments To display the channels 9 16 Press the F button to toggle between the two channel displays Channels 1 8 and Channels 9 16 Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously While holding the G ALL CH button press one of the 1 A W 8 A W buttons SETUP menu The current settings of the Mixing Console page 91 displays and other panel set tings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts E Setup recording procedure Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU gt A SONG CREATOR TAB lt 4
110. 11 Changing Setups to imate the Style iss ies e erret rtr ere prre rr operas One Touch Setting page 51 Saving and recalling custom panel setups sss Registration Memory page 135 Creating Voices Styles Songs and more Creating your original VOICES xs einen rp rrr rop e eh eee or teta bep MOICGSGEu ediscere esed eres page 99 Creating your original Organ Flutes Voices sseseeeeee VOICE SEU ss cese emt eis page 103 Creating your original Styles tere ertt rr Ree inea risani Style Cret siseses risina page 118 Creating yo r original SOMBS iz aiis lt sessedssanconessconsovnnssesvesevsesvesvousovsess aia sa ii aapa deoueobsestonniedvensesigos sesandengs ovoeds page 43 MIDI recording of your keyboard performance essen pages 43 147 Inputting NOLES ONE Dy Ore eret rte rene aeree Song Creator amp oesieeeene page 153 Inputting and editing ccn tette rere e es tias Song Creator i n page 162 gssienpe M page 63 s Creating youroriginalMultiPads sies cerno ore torre tror spi rr bn e eR n Multi Pad Creator page 132 Creating Registration Memory Danke ede sei et order p berto Prep Re Ee Ee Eee asso io ise ED buda p E page 138 s Creating MEW MUSIC FINderreGOrdS iissa eros peo Est Erro Peek tont erit eae BOE EHE ERR Y eei rosas ke tesa te TESEN page 113 Creating n
111. 2 button and CH 3 16 are assigned to the EXTRA TR button 1 Press the CHANNEL ON OFF button to call up the Song CHANNEL ON OFF display If the display shown below does not appear press the CHANNEL ON OFF button again SONG STYLI CHANNEL ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 amp 7 8 ON On On On On On On On 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 On On On On On On On On 2 Use the 1A W 8A V buttons to turn each channel on or off If you want to play back only one particular channel muting all other chan nels press and hold down one of the 1 A W 8 A W buttons correspond ing to the desired channel To cancel solo playback press the same button again wn o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD 146 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI Recording Your Performance to MIDI You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a USB storage device Several different recording methods are available Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple channels and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one And since the recorded data is MIDI you can easily edit your songs too For details on MIDI see page 201 What is MIDI For details on USB Audio Recording PSR S900 only see page 63 Recording Methods There are three met
112. 3 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Editing Lyrics LYRICS The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 162 From this display you can edit the recorded Lyrics events The operations here are basically the same as in the section Editing Note or Chord Events on page 167 Lyrics Events Name Allows you to enter the Song name Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics Codes CR Enters a line break in the lyrics text LF Unavailable on the instrument On some MIDI devices this event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the next set of lyrics Inputting and Editing Lyrics Use the 4A W 5 A W DATA ENTRY buttons to call up the lyrics editing display Operations are the same as in the section Entering Characters page 77 2 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the spe cial website by directly connecting to the Internet This section contains terms related to computers and online communications If there are some terms you are unfamiliar with refer to the Internet Glossary page 183 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full time online connection ADSL
113. 72 se Ais JuauUuedWosoy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis 3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB lt gt buttons and check to see if the record has been added Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display 1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display 2 Press the H DELETE FROM FAVORITE button PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 113 Convenient Music Finder feature N CAUTION You can also change a preset record to create a new one If you want to keep the original preset make sure to change the name and register the edited record as a new record see step 5 page 114 Keep in mind that the Beat set ting made here is only for the Music Finder search function this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e oO ob c uu The maximum number of records is 2500 PSR S900 1200 PSR S700 including internal records Editing Records You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record The newly created records are automatically saved in the internal memory Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display 2 Press the 8 A V RECORD EDIT button to call up the Edit display MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT MUSIC A Boy From The Country KEYH
114. 80 0000 0020 Q 001 3 0000 Mote Fei 92 0000 0020 ER 001 3 0960 Note F 1 32 0000 0020 001 4 0000 Mote C 1 115 0000 0020 PTEN O 001 4 0000 Hote F 1 32 0000 0020 33M J BAR BERT GLK 001 1 0000 popups MC FX FSS TAA rsa FXB Es CUu STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat STEP RECORD d 4 19Z0PPQ 001 1 0000 n 001 1 0000 001 1 0000 Hote F 1 92 0000 0020 E 001 1 0960 Hote F 1 32 0000 0020 001 2 0000 Mote F 1 92 0000 0020 g3 001 2 0960 Note ci 50 0000 0020 001 2 0960 Mote F 1 32 0000 0020 001 3 0000 Note ci 80 0000 0020 20 001 3 0000 Note F 1 92 0000 0020 001 3 0960 Hote F 1 32 0000 0020 001 4 0000 Hote c 1 115 0000 0020 BAR BERT GLK 001 1 0000 Harota EB In the EDIT display you can record notes with absolutely precise timing This Step 001 4 0000 Hote F 1 0000 0020 Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording page 152 with the exception of the points listed below e In the Song Creator the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Style Cre ator it cannot be changed This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed depending on the selected section For example if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display e Recording
115. A W button to adjust the brightness of the display UTILITY nus CREE CONFIG 2 esa DEE CRE a ee ia Sia 1 LCD BRIGHTHESS 20 A VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS OPEHM amp SELECT 2 DISPLAY VOICE MUMBER OFF Be DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO 0N MD Qe H LJ D LCD BRIGHT HESS E T s Fia 1 2 3 4 5 6 va 8 a B f B B B fa fa v Dv vj Ev ivl vl Er pr 20 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Dis play You can have your name appear in the opening display the display that appears when the power is turned on uononpo4qu Example display from PSR S900 Call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB 4 OWNER 2 Press the I OWNER NAME button and call up the Owner Name dis play Refer to page 77 for character entry details UTILITY nus cR Us CEAESS 323 OC OWNER Exes ES 3531 1 OWHER MAME A LAMGUAGE ENGLISH F B JG 0 A CASE 81 RBc2 DEF3 GHI4 JKLS MM06 0K Pars7 Tuva uxvz3 0 SwBoI DELETE CANCEL Displaying the version number To check the version number of this instrument press the 7 A V l 8A V VERSION buttons in the display in step 1 above Press the EXIT or 8 A W button to return to the original display
116. AL BEAT is set to 8 Beat and BEAT CONVERTER is set to 12 all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th note triplet timing The 16A and 16B Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to 12 Beat are variations on a basic 16th note setting Produces a swing feel by shifting the timing of the back beats depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above For example if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8 Beat the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd 4th 6th and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel The settings A through E produce different degrees of swing with A being the most subtle and E being the most pronounced FINE Selects a variety of Groove templates to be applied to the selected section The PUSH settings cause certain beats to be played early while HEAVY settings delay the timing of certain beats The numbered settings 2 3 4 5 determine which beats are to be affected All beats up to the specified beat but not including the first beat will be played early or delayed for example the 2nd and 3rd beats if 3 is selected In all cases A types produce minimum effect B types produce medium effect and C types produce maximum effect E DYNAMICS This changes the velocity volume or accent of certain notes in the Style playback The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selec
117. AMERICA mercury COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE Responsible Party Address Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 714 522 9011 Electronic Keyboard PSR S900 S700 Telephone Type of Equipment Model Name This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor dance with the following code BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the ter minal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA
118. ANCE J 100 85 100 100 100 iu ONG STYLE 4M PAD MIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INTERNET a A A A v Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EXI To close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument press the EXIT button EXIT Operations in the Special Website Scrolling the Display When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument a scroll bar appears at the right side of the display Use the DATA ENTRY dial to scroll through the display and view those parts of the page that are not shown INTERNET DIRECT CONNECTION Keyboard Tips amp Tricks Scroll bar RETURN TO HELP OT Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet 172 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Operations in the Special Website Following Links When there is a link in the page it is shown as a button or in colored text etc To select the link press the 6 W 7 A W 8 W buttons Press the B A ENTER but ton to actually call up the link destination Welcome to Internet Direct Connection Accessthousandsof LEARN MUSIC A downloadable songs online iF music lessons and bonus material CET MUSIC B G Qo H ACCOUNT D l Web page has been displayed I E er
119. ATION BANK Selection display gl v lt lt gt PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 137 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Disabling Recall of Specific Items Freeze Function Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press However there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same even when switching Registration Memory setups For example you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style This is where the Freeze function comes in handy It lets you maintain the set tings of certain items and leave them unchanged even when selecting other Regis tration Memory buttons N CAUTION Call up the operation display Settings in the REGISTRATION FUNCTION E REGIST SEQUENCE FREEZE VOICE SET FREEZE display are automati TAB lt 4 PB FREEZE cally saved to the instrument when you exit from this dis play However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost Press the 2A V 7 A V buttons to select items Enter checkmarks for the items to be Frozen i e to remain unchanged by pressing the 8 A V button Press the EXIT button to exit from the operation display OY WN Press the FREEZE button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order
120. Ashman Music by Alan Menken O 1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Com pany Inc All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Can t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright O 1961 Renewed 1989 Gladys Music ASCAP Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company Inc International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved PSR S700 The followings are the titles credits and copyright notices for two 2 of the songs pre installed in this instrument Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music by Alan Menken O 1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Com pany Inc All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Hey Jude Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright O 1968 Sony ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony ATV Music Publishing 8 Music Square West Nashville TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Table of Contents Introduction What can you do with the PORTATONE 12 Panel Controls n itti 14 Playing the Keyboard esee 16 Powet SUPDIY sisesicccescccecetece secesencssascaeosecesesdes 16 Powering Up rete 17 Setting Up essere 18 MUSIC ci 18 Using Headphone
121. CHOIR amp E PIANO SAXOPHONE TRUMPET ORGAN FLUTES o e e s ej e O Jsrmwes Oo S O Brass O JN E o jussa METRONOME button page 34 Oooo 00000 280 00000 8 SBBBBBBB I UEEHIEREUEEONY oe Playing Preset Voices The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders Voice buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the preset Voices For example press the PIANO button to display various piano Voices GUITAR amp ACCORDION amp PERC amp Co sass Oo joren O JUARMONICA LO prum kir 9 E PIANO ej SAXOPHONE eJ TRUMPET 9J eom s 9 ORGAN FLUTES FLUTE amp SYNTH amp O Jsmwes o AUTE ND O 8n ss o jy O Juser BEGG About the various Voices Refer to the Voice List in the Data List available at the Yamaha website See page 5 Press the PART SELECT RIGHT 1 button to call up the Voice selection display The Voice selected here is for the RIGHT 1 part For the Voice part see page 84 Make sure that the PART ON OFF RIGHT1 button is also turned on If it is turned off the right hand part will not sound PART SELOTA DO Determining how the Voice selection display is opened when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed You can select how the Voice selection display is opened when one of the VOICE category selection bu
122. CHORD FINGERING CHORD TUTOR FINGERED MULTI FINGER Both Sinsle Finger and Fingered are Possible For Sinsle Finger press the white black keys CHORD HRHE C AAEH closest to the root note Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce c For a major chord orchestrated accompani i press the root key only ment using major seventh minor and minor seventh Cm chords by pressing a mini Tm mum number of keys on the Chord section of the key simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left il For a minor chord board This type is available For a seventh chord only for Style playback simultaneously press the root The abbreviated chord fin st U1 key and a white key to its lett i i i Cm7 gerings described at right are t I T Fora minorssventh hord used simultaneously press the root key and ele both a white and black key to its left MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering types FINGERED Lets you finger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm bass and chord accompaniment in the selected Style The Fingered type rec ognize
123. Cae eed EJIE SONP nett ero n dori UE EeE Deu 162 Edit Style Edit Vocal Elarmony iei eto Orbe 184 Edit Voice ERFECI MT rS Effect microphone Effect Return Level Effect Type EFFECT EQ Entering Characters eorr orent orte reta EQ Equalizer EQUAL TEMPERAMENT re NM REN EXIT F Factory RESEU 6 uote e ros Hes eere Pa eta d Ege es 79 Factory programmed Settings FADE IN OUT Song FADE IN OUT Style Fade In Out time FADE IN OUT HOLD TIME Fast forward Favorite 1 File File Selection Display 3 tenete RERO File Selection Display Basic Operation File Selection Display Configuration File Folder Operations sirere toas FILTER ee FINGERED FINGERED ON BASS Flash Memory Fold r s ie acne Follow MoNS ecco ere ORE IEEE FOOT PEDAL trono tetto rt e ern FOOTAGE onnenn FORMAL usen FREEZE siesd ieira FULL KEYBOARD Function display 4 saseeee esos cese eye tees eevee nissin G Glossary of Internet Terms seem GM System Level 1 GM System Level 2 GROOVE HARMONY eese esti pet coca oo eaae er EE E HARMONY ECHO Headphones Home Page ICON Initializing Internet Settings Internet Direct Connection Internet Settings oreesa PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 217 xipuaddy Appendix 218 K Karaoke e Karao
124. Co COCO mp C9 C 36093 C C3 L NEW SON L SYNC START L NEW SONG L SYNJ ART 17 18 Press the SONG gt HH PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display You can also edit the Songs you ve recorded as necessary page 162 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Z CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 197 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 I9 ob c TD Recording Your Performance to MIDI Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data it may not appear exactly the same as shown here About the items which can be selected via the G H I but tons See page 155 158 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Example 3 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 152 e 1 456 7 The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers In this example keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the entire
125. DNS server1 255 255 255 0 Gateway 1 192 168 0 1 DNS server2 IP address Subnet mask CONTROL NENU Q Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used O DNS server 1 DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers These settings must be made when Use DHCP above is set to ON set DNS manu ally or OFF IP address Subnet mask Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used The settings here are IP address subnet mask and gateway server address These settings must be made when Use DHCP above is set to OFF Gateway ESTA jeujodu au O j eutQ 00Z5 006S 3Sd eui Sunoeuuo PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 179 Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet Operations in the Special Website Wireless LAN These settings here are only necessary when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor For a wireless LAN setup make sure to set both the LAN settings on the previous page and the Wireless LAN settings below RNET SETTING The Wireless LAN settings are not necessary when using the Make a written note of the settings here in INTE case you have to enter them again Wireless Game Adaptor Wireless networks 1 d SSID SSID Channel Channel Encryption WEP key type i i Encryption WEP key length i WEP key WEP key type WEP key length WEP key CONTROL ME
126. DZ amp 5JJ Cool8Beat LL Cool8Beat RHYTHM PAD CENE amp Cool8Beat BASS PHRASE1 Um Cool8Beat B Cool8Beat CHORD1 PHRASEZ Cool8Beat Cool8Beat Section display Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the A D and F I buttons Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again Select the Style containing the pat tern you want to replace in the Style Selection display To return to the previous screen press the EXIT button after selecting the Style Select the desired section of the newly imported Style chosen in step 3 above by using the 2A V 3 A V SECTION buttons Select the desired channel for the section chosen in step 4 above by using the 4A W 5 A V CHANNEL buttons Repeat steps 3 5 above to replace the patterns of other channels Press the J SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display and save your data from the display page 73 Style Creator You cannot select the SECTION INTRO 4 ENDING 4 directly via the panel operation AN CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation page 73 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 123 se Ais jueuirueduioooy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis Style Creator Selecting a file saved to the USB storage device You can also sele
127. E 001 4 0000 Hote F3 79 0000 1900 002 1 0000 Hote 63 79 0000 1900 E gt poH Hote LEJ 79 0000 1900 002 2 1900 End zoom m iaa r BRR BERT CLK 002 3 0000 v Fi Fis rsa ba cmm lt PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 153 un o0 c o un o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD Recording Your Performance to MIDI N CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 Move the cursor to the begin ning of the Song Press the SONG Bl STOP button during recording 6 10 1 Press the 6 A W button to enter a quarter note rest To enter the rest use the 4 A W 8 A V buttons Press the button once to select the rest value and once again to actually enter it A rest having spec ified note length will be entered fh a De 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a fal fal fad fad fad fa fa v dv fv v vi tv v Play the C4 key Mill Press the SONG Bl STOP button to move the cursor to the begin ning of the Song H a gt gt L H lt lt o 9 U VCO m 920 LE 3 L NEW SONG L SYNC START L NEW SO
128. ECIO tees P 43 O BE 1 STOP button P 37 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual oo Ses m Q P MB PLAY PAUSE button n P 36 O lt 4 PP REW FF buttons sees P 142 STYLE 6 STYLE buttons tereti be cerne rede P 46 TRANSPOSE GH ES buttons n ret FE a ia P 59 METORONOME MEIRONOMAE b ttOR c tt tr ro e rmt P 34 TAP TEMPO TAP TEMPO Dutton c oen toi tre rra trea kh P 48 TEMPO e A Dtos 4 i oder erre eir deret eon o Ee beo feror enean P 34 FADE IN OUT FADE IN OUT button ccc cecsccesseccessseceesseeceesaees P 48 STYLE CONTROL OTS LINK DURO A secret on rer ette re ten P 51 AUTO FILL IN button esee P 49 ACMP DUO iieri cota ru erae rero rere xa heec P 47 9 INTRO IJ I IHI buttons P 48 MAIN VARIATION A BI C D buttons P 49 GV BREAK DUT OM nesciente eret prt rrr rt Ere eres P 49 ENDING rit I H HI buttons eeeeneennn P 49 9 SYNC STOP button sse nnns P 49 D ISYNC START button oir tren tret rra coto P 48 START STOP button cessere P 48 D8 00 n e O00 DU T T Aaaa A a e amp ES G5 el Gi GO GE DDE RS GO GU Uu UK Wd RU GS C D Ee En we D UD we aw
129. EEJ unasEnank CD 2 Press the EXIT button to close the pop up window showing the cur rent measure number or Phrase Mark number E Repeat Playback Chain Playback Call up the operation display FUNCTION B SONG SETTING 2 Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the H I buttons The available parameters are shown below REPEAT MODE OFF Plays through the selected Song then stops SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder containing the current Song repeatedly RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the folder containing the current Song a o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks you can set Repeat Playback to ON or OFF When this is on the part corre sponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark num ber are the same as in the steps 1 2 of the section Moving back and forth rewind and fast forward see above 142 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual E Queuing the Next Playback Song While a Song is playing back you can queue up the next Song for playback This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selectio
130. Enter the file name page 77 5 Press the 8 A OK button to save the file To cancel the Save operation press the 8 W CANCEL button N CAUTION The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save oper ation When the following message appears Song changed Save Song speichern Song modifi Sauv Song cambiado Guardar Salvare Song The recorded data has not yet been saved To save the data press the G YES button to open the Song selection dis play and save the data see above To cancel the operation press the H NO button Playing Songs saved to USER or a USB storage device Refer to page 37 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback YAMAHA o ooo e e c ccce 9 9 o 9 Do c eOoo o 995 eee BET Before using performance assistant technology To use the performance assistant technology the Song must contain chord data If the Song contains this data the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not Oooo 00000 Litt TTTTT oso 00000 8 select a Song page 36 In these example instructions u
131. FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to acces sories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Fail ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori zation to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to com ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regula tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit DFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reor
132. FCC DoC This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd 2 wires For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3RI Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Rua Joaquim Floriano 913 4 andar Itaim Bibi CEP 04534 013 Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL Tel 011 3704 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 4 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes
133. FF button to call up the STYLE display SONG CH 1 8 9 16 A Song consists of sixteen separate channels Here you can adjust the level balance among these sixteen channels or parts These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel CHANNEL ON OFF button to call up the SONG display wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c uu 2 Adjustable Items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE Dis plays The following explanations cover the available items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE displays VOL VOICE The RHY2 channel in the SONG AUTO REVOICE See page 94 STYLE PART display can only be assigned to Drumkit Voices VOICE Allows you to re select the Voices for each part When the Style and SFX kit Voices channels are called up neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User When playing GM song data Voices can be selected When the Song channels are called up channel 10 in the SONG CH User Voices cannot be selected 9 16 can only be used for a Drum Kit Voice PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part channel VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts 92 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual FILTER Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect page 101 for each part BRIGHTNESS TU
134. FFECT EQ VOICE SET JazzDraw tab display FOOTAGE ORGAN TYPE Sine VINTAGE Min ROTARY SP SPEED stoy gt FAST B iG 4 If you select the EFFECT EQ tab display use the A B buttons to select the parameter to be edited PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 103 wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c e 2 104 Voice Creating Voice Set N CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings the settings will be lost If you wish to store the settings here make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off Footage The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of tradi tional pipe organs in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths in feet PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 5 Use the A D F H and 1 A W 8 A V buttons to edit the Voice 6 Press the I SAVE button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice page 73 Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET ORGAN FLUTES displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the Basic Procedure The Organ Flutes parameters are organized into three different pages The parameters in each page are described separately below These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters page 105 which
135. G CONSOLE ee 111 Convenient Music Finder feature 111 Searching the Records sese 111 Creating a Set of Favorite Records 113 Editing Records esee 114 Saving the Record seeeeeeeeeen 115 Style Creator ocn itte reteneecenenes 118 Style Structule e eerte tes i exert e dieere 118 Creating a Style erect reet ertet 118 Editing the Created Style sssssssss 124 The Multi Pads 132 Multi Pad Creating Multi Pad Creator 132 Multi Pad Realtime Recording 132 Multi Pad Step Recording EDIT 133 Multi Pad Editing Multi Pad Creator 134 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Registration Memory 135 Registering and Saving Custom Panel UDIN 135 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups 136 Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup Naming a Panel Setupussie eO RH BEN 137 Disabling Recall of Specific Items Freeze FUNCION 3 eoe erre onto nhe tiiis 138 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order Registration Sequence sese 138 Using Creating and Editing SOngs iiirasssse estes eras spa sod acaesaasia ease 140 Compatible Song Types eee 140 Operations for Song Playback 141 Adjusting the Volume Balan
136. GAL Yamaha Hazen M sica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S A The Music House 147 Skiathou Street 112 55 Athens Greece Tel 01 228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Neringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 IS 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraDe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 ASIA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 481 53 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16 513 P O Box 17328 Jubel Ali Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel 971 4 881 5868 THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247
137. HAIN D 1 2 8 A A A M Y Y TT Use the 5 A W 6 A W buttons to determine the length number of measures of the selected section Actually enter the specified length for the selected section by pressing the D EXECUTE button Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the F REC CH button and pressing the appropriate numbered but ton 1 V 8 V To cancel the selection press the appropriate numbered button 1 W 8 V again 4 TAB gt STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat CERIRSTIRENUTITAMNINSNAITIMSISAESDINQ o e38 CJ 8 e jJ Cc H D ES PAD Ee PHRI E aad PHR2 E ad 9 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the 1 A 8 A buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display 0 To delete a channel simultaneously hold down the J DELETE but ton and press the appropriate numbered button 1 A 8 A You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again before releasing your finger from the J button 11 12 13 14 15 Start recording by pressing the Style Control START STOP button Playback of the specified section starts Since the accompaniment pattern plays back
138. IDI Transmit Settings The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 204 This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent E13E3 3 TRANSMIT Miana LS Se aaa MULTI PADI MIDI USB CHS MULTI PAD2 _ MIDI USB CHG MULTI PADS 12345678239 MIDI UBBO OO OO OOOO TRA ER PART CHANNEL MOTE CHANGE CHANGE BEND TOUCH Operation Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via which the selected part will be transmitted You can also determine the types of data to be sent With the exception of the next two parts the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual e UPPER The keyboard part played on the right side of the key oc board from the Split Point for the Voices RIGHT1 and el or 2 J ei e LOWER pe The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard o2 from the Split Point for the Voices This is not affected by 3 the on off status of the ACMP button S PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 207 wn D gt o Q ES x 5 O fa S z c o E 2 5 N 8 gt eo c us 2 208 MIDI Settings Tx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel 1 16 flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the chan nel s 2 NOTE When different parts are ass
139. If the Song contains the chord data the current chord name will be displayed in the CHORD segment see below Pressing the A button calls up the Song Selection display page 36 O BAR BEAT current position of the Song or Style Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style Tempo Displays the current tempo of the Song or Style O Style name and related information Displays the currently selected Style name time signature and tempo Pressing the D button calls up the Style Selection display page 46 Q Current chord name If the ACMP button is set to On the chord specified in the chord section of the key board will be displayed Q Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units page 59 Q Octave The UPPER OCTAVE buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps This shows the amount that the octave value is shifted Split Point Split Points are specific positions notes on the keyboard that divide the keyboard into separate sections There are two kinds of Split Points A which separates the chord sec tion from the rest of the keyboard and L which divides the left hand and right hand sections Recording status of USB Audio recorder PSR S900 While recording a REC indication appears 9 Registration Sequence Appears when the Registration Sequence is active page 138 68 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manua
140. MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Z rich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC SLOVAKIA HUNGARY SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria CEE Department Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z 0 0 Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 PK 39 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshandlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTU
141. Multi Pad phrase The corresponding phrase in this case for Pad 1 starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed To stop it press and release the STOP button SELECT 1 2 3 4 STOP MULTI PAD CONTROL Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo You can even play two three or four Multi Pads at the same time Pressing the pad during its play back will stop playing and begin playing from the top again About the color of the Multi Pads Green Indicates that the corresponding pad contains data phrase Red Indicates that the corresponding pad is playing back Multi Pad data There are two types of Multi Pad data Some types will play back once and stop when they reach to the end Others will play back repeatedly until you press the STOP button Stopping playback of the Multi Pads To stop all pads press and release the STOP button To stop specific pads simultaneously hold down the STOP button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Using Chord Match Many of the Multi Pad phrases are melodic or chordal and you can have these phrases automatically change chords as you do with your left hand While a style is playing back and ACMP is on simply play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads Chord Match changes the pitch to match the chords
142. NE PORTAMENTO TIME Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency page 101 Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time Higher values result in a longer pitch change time Setting this to 0 results in no effect This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono page 100 PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each keyboard part when a pedal is assigned to this function OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each keyboard part TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch KEY BOARD Song playback SONG or overall sound of the instru ment MASTER respectively EFFECT TYPE Select the desired effect type page 95 After editing various parameters for the selected effect type you can save it as an orig inal effect REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or chan nel CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or chan nel DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel EQ Equalizer TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the per formance environment page
143. NG SY ART 8 9 Press the SONG I PLAY PAUSE button to hear the newly entered notes Press the EXIT button to exit from the Step Record display If you want you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner page 162 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted 2 Use the A B buttons in the STEP RECORD display page 152 to select the data you want to delete Press the J DELETE button to delete the selected data 154 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI About items which can be selected via the G H I buttons in the Step Record display G button Determines the velocity loudness of the note to be entered Items Velocity to be recorded Kbd Vel Actual velocity you play the keyboard with fff 127 ff 111 f 95 mf 79 mp 63 p 47 pp 31 ppp 15 H button Determines the gate time note length of the note to be entered Items Gate time to be recorded Normal 8 Tenuto ee 99 Staccato MEME 20 Staccatissimo F 20 Manual The gate time note length can be set to any desired percentage by using the DATA ENTRY dial I button Determines the note type to be entered Pressing the button
144. NU ESTA Q Wireless Networks Determines whether or not Wireless Networks are displayed SSID Determines the SSID setting Channel Determines the channel O Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted WEP key type WEP key length WEP key These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled These set the type and length of the encryption key Others INTERNET SETTING BROMSER LAN Usa OTHERS Proxy server 1 Proxy port i 080 Non proxy server Delete cookies Delete all bookmarks Initialize setup Connect information CONTROL MENU Q Proxy server Proxy port Non proxy server Determines the proxy server name port number and the host name for the non proxy server The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server Delete cookies Deletes the information of all saved cookies O Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks O Initialize setup Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults See Initializ ing Internet Settings on page 182 Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection 180 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Operations in the Special Website Changing the Home Page In the default condition the top page of the special website is automatically set to be the Home page for the browser However you can specify any desired page on
145. ORD 70 CLEAR STYLE Bluezrass CLEAR DELETE EXE 3 4 474 6 8 OTHER TIT ow aa TEMPO SECTION GENRE INTRO 1 INTRO 2 Christmas 150 INTRO 2 gt INTRO 3 Classical LINTRO 3 CED ES E 3 Edit the record as desired Editing the song name keyword Style name Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display page 112 Changing the Tempo Press the 1 A W TEMPO button Memorizing the Section Intro Main Ending Use the 2 A W 4 A W buttons to select the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected This is useful for example when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro sec tion Editing the Genre Select the desired genre by using the 5 A W 6 A W GENRE buttons When creating a new genre press the 7 A W GENRE NAME button and input the genre name page 77 Deleting the Currently Selected Record Press the I DELETE RECORD button Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions Press the 8 V CANCEL button 4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display press the E FAVORITE button to turn on the FAVORITE 5 Enter the edits you ve made to the record as described below Creating a new record Press the J NEW RECORD button The record is added to the ALL display If you ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE displ
146. ORD button to call up the character Entering several different key entry display words Wbucan sessch several diferent 2 Enter the song title or music genre or the keyword page 77 keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator comma between each Search by Style name 1 Press the C STYLE button to call up the Style selection display 2 Usethe A J buttons to select a Style 3 Press the EXIT button to return to the search display un Q gt E A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e oO ob c uu e Adding other Search Criteria You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name keyword Style name BEAT eren Select the beat time signature you want to use in your performance by pressing the D button All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY SEARCH AREA Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing the E button These correspond to the tabs at the top of the Music Finder display TEMPO Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your per formance by using the 1 A W 2 A V TEMPO but tons GENRE ss Select the desired music genre by using the 5 A W 6 A V GENRE buttons 112 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual Convenient Music Finder feature 5 Press the 8 A START SEARCH button to start the search
147. ORMAL Start overwrite recording Stop recording 2 V v REPLACE ALL 5 5 B 5 NORMAL Start overwrite recording Stop recording V v PUNCH OUT i 2 3 n s REN NORMAL uir recording je overwrite recording Play original data PUNCH OUT AT 006 i iai Play the keyboard to ing 2 FIRST KEY ON ducc Original data w Start overwrite recording gi recording HECEBDEREE 3 a 5 iai Play the keyboard to ina 2 FIRST KEY ON i Original data E start overwrite rac rding recording PUNCH OUT E 5 n a rr Play back Original dat Play the keyboard to Stop overwrite recording Play original data FIRST KEY ON ae aad start overwrite recording v PUNCH OUT AT 006 5 a 5 ae Play back Original data Stop recording PUNCH IN AT 003 e i W Start overwrite recording v REPLACE ALL C e NK n E Play back Original data Stop recording PUNCH IN AT 003 V W Start overwrite recording v PUNCH OUT 3 4 5 Play back Original data Stop overwrite recording Play original data PUNCH IN AT 003 V W Start overwrite recording v PUNCH OUT AT 006 M 05 4 5 NNNCHNNN NEN NNNM EIE ERN 1 To avoid overwriting measures 1 2 start recording from measure 3 HESS Previously recorded data 2 To stop recording press the REC button at the end of measure 5 Newly recorded data Deleted data E Pedal Punch In Out settings When this is set to ON you can use the Foot Pedal 2 to control the punch in and punch out points While a Song is playing ba
148. On the first song in the media will be 7138999 selected automatically In this example press the F YES button to start formatting the USB storage device USB flash memory floppy disk etc Instant Selection of the Displays Direct Access Instant Selection of the Displays Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function you can instantly call up the desired display with just a single additional button press Press the DIRECT ACCESS button A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button 2 Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display Refer to the Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 Example of calling up the Guide function display Press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the GUIDE button uoneiodQ aiseg FUNCTION MENU v MANTETUNE SA i DIGITAL REC MENU Pressing a button on the panel or pedal footswitch foot controller jumps to the relevant setup page of D the respective button or pedal The button or a pedal works as a DIRECT ACCESS shortcut key Press EXIT to return to the MAIN display V GUIDE V SONG SETTING Follow Liahts GUIDE MODE n fin Ke Sons Playback Pauses and waits Karao Key for you to Play the correct note Playback conti
149. Operations in the Special Website 2 3 Entering Characters When the character input dis play is opened you can enter characters Refer to Entering Characters on page 77 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual About the Internet Settings Display From the Internet Settings display you can make various settings related to the Internet connection including preferences for the menus and displays The Internet Settings display has four sub displays Browser LAN Wireless LAN and Others Basic Operation Press the 5 W SETTING button to call up the Internet Setting display Press the TAB lt 4 gt buttons to select the desired display Select the desired item by pressing the 1 A V A V button INTERNET SETTING BROWSER LAN WIRELESS OTHERS Encode Western European Home page i Internet Direct Homepage Set current paze as Home Restore default Home Show images On UK time GMT Time zone CONTROL MENU EMET v 3 To call up the relevant Edit display press the 2 A V 3 A V EDIT button For some items the Edit display may not be shown but the setting or change may be executed Press the 2A V A V button to select the setting or change the value This can also be done by using the DATA ENTRY dial INTERNET SETTING LAN HIRELESS OTHERS Encode Western European Home page i Internet Direct Homepage
150. PSR S900 5700 Owner s Manual Style Playback related Settings The PSR S900 S700 has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display below Call up the operation display FUNCTION C STYLE SETTINC SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB lt 1 gt STYLE SETTING Use the 1A V 8 A V buttons for each setting STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING STYLE SETTING BSR eee SYNCHRO STOP WIMDOW OFF STYLE TOUCH OFF STYLE CHANGE BEHAY SECTION SET OFF TEMPO RESET PART ON OFF RESET TOR SYNCHRO STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR STOP OTSLINK STOP STYLE ACHP TIMING HINDOH TOUGH SECTION SET TEMPO ON OFF EN NND INTRO err tine OFF ru STYLE NEXT 3 on MAIN B HOLD HOLD 3ti33 BRR Sm wars c RESET RESET Stop Accompaniment When ACMP is turned on and SYNC START is off you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped and still hear the accompa niment chord In this condition called Stop Accompaniment any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root type are shown in the display Here you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status OFF s The chord played in the chord section will not sound STYLE etre The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices of the selected Style m The chor
151. Poured DTA t t t t Input jack Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no zero resistance Phone plug Phone plug standard standard Using External Audio Devices for Play back OUTPUT jacks Audio cable You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the instrument s sound The microphone or gui tar sound connected to the instrument s MIC LINE IN Playing External Audio Devices with the jack is output at the same time Use audio cables for Built in Speakers O AUX IN jacks connection as shown in the diagrams These jacks are aa located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument The stereo outputs from another instrument can be con nected to these jacks allowing the sound of an external N CAUTION instrument to be reproduced via the instrument s speak ss p mei east sound is an to an Mapa ers Connect the output jacks LINE OUT etc of an Qusocud vus Ou T external synthesizer or the tone generator module and the power off the instrument s AUX IN L L R R jacks using appro Do not route the output from the OUTPUT jacks to the priate audio cables AUX IN jacks If you make this connection the signal input at the AUX IN jacks is output from the OUTPUT Instrument jacks These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible and may even damage both pieces of equipment Synthesizer Tone generator LINE OUT Phone plug standard Pin
152. S900 S700 Owner s Manual During Style Playback FADE IN OUT OTS LINK AUTO FILL IN SYNC SYNC START ACMP INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP o Oo Oo Oo O o Oo Oo o O o Oo o o O I I LH A B C D AS I ll Ml a 7 gt a STYLE CONTROL Main This is used for playing the main part of the Song It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures and repeats indefinitely Each preset Style features four different patterns Press one of the MAIN A D buttons during Style playback Fill In The fill in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment to make your per formance sound even more professional Turn on the AUTO FILL IN button before starting Style playback or during playback Then simply press one of the MAIN VARIATION A B C D buttons as you play and the selected fill in section plays automatically AUTO FILL spicing up the auto accompaniment When the fill in is finished it leads smoothly into the selected main section A B C D Even when AUTO FILL IN button is turned off pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically plays a fill in before returning to the same main section 9 Break This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment to make your performance sound even more professional Press the BREAK button during Style pla
153. SE display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 61 62 Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics on TV PSR S900 This convenient sing along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument for your playing purposes while only the lyrics are shown on a separate TV monitor page 59 so your audience can sing along 1 cai up the operation display FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB 4 SCREEN OUT 2 Press the 3 A 4 A button to select LYRICS TEXT Making Announcements Between Songs PSR S900 This function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances When singing a song several effects are usually assigned to the MIC Setup When speaking to your audience however these effects may sound dis turbing or unnatural Whenever the TALK function is turned on effects are automatically turned off p B Before your performance press the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button to call up the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY display MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY rak 0FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIC EFFECISOFF oe MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HANONY m TYPE VOCAL SIGN 2 Press the 2 A 3 A TALK button to turn the function on BOG Talk settings can be customized as well allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak
154. SER display You can then save all these original templates as a single file to USB storage devices in the MIDI SETUP selection dis play called up by pressing FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt SYSTEM RESET Basic Operation Call up the operation MIDI template selection display Function I MIDI LAAI Parts mit MIDI Accordi num KBD amp STYLE man MIDI Accord2 ua Master KBD ua MIDI Pedall mua Song mua MIDI Pedal2 piat Clock Ext pian MIDI OFF DELETE SAVE 2 To use the pre programmed templates or to edit them Press the TAB 44 button to select the PRESET dis play Press one of the A J buttons to select a MIDI template To use the templates already saved to the USER display or to edit them Press the TAB f button to select the USER display Press one of the A J buttons to select a MIDI tem plate 3 To edit a template press the 8 V EDIT but ton to call up the MIDI display for editing The individual parameters settings are shown for the selected template Here you can edit each parame ter SYSTEM BET 13953038 5 530 aia A 1 LocaL conrnoL v z CLOCK INTERNAL TRANSMIT CLOCK 0FF E RECEIVE TransPosE oFF START STOP SONG SYS EX Tx 0N Rx 0H CHORD SYS EX Tx 0H Rx 0H SONG STYLE cH PRD LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT LLOM ji ON ON LLON J ON Jj ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 4 Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up t
155. SH button To cancel loading of a page if the page is taking too long to open press the 6 A STOP button Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The messages and icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate the current Internet connection status Message Web page has been displayed The following three messages are displayed according to the loading status of the web page Disconnected This appears when the instrument is not connected with the Internet When this message is displayed the web page cannot be seen Icon 1 is displayed Now opening web page The web page is being loaded Icon 2 flashes Web page has been displayed Loading of the web page is completed and the page is displayed completely Icon 2 stops flashing When the displayed web page uses SSL icon 3 is dis played and information is encrypted for communication Strength of the reception is displayed in 4 when connecting to the Internet by wireless LAN When reception is weak move the instrument near the access point to improve reception Purchasing and Downloading Data You can purchase and download Song data for playback on this instrument and other types of data from the special website For details on purchasing and down loading data refer to the instructions on the site itself Operation after purchase and download When downloading is completed a message appears asking you whether or n
156. Signature Determines the key signature as well as the major minor set ting for the music score shown on the display XGPrm XG Parameters Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parame ters Refer to the MIDI Data Format in the Data List for details The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 SysEx System Exclusive Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here however you can delete cut copy and paste the data sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursp Meta Meta Event Displays the SMF meta events in the Song Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here however you can delete cut copy and paste the data Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Z CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 169 un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL ue c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD x Recording Your Performance to MIDI 170 N CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 7
157. Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 E QUANTIZE menu The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel For example if you record the musical phrase shown at right you may not play it with absolute precision and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing Quantize is a conve nient way of correcting for this CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized SIZE Selects the quantize size resolution For optimum results you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel For example if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel you should use eighth note as the Quantize size TEETER V After eighth note quantization J A Aas quarter eighth note sixteenth thirty second sixteenth note note note note eighth note triplet ds Js Jos Aus quarter eighth note sixteenth eighth note sixteenth note triplet X triplet note triplet eighth note six note triplet teenth triplet The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks are exceptionally conve nient since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time For example when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel if you quantize by the straight eighth notes all notes in the channel are quantized
158. Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 204 SYSTEM BET ETHER 353028 17 05 38 ois SYS EX Tx 0H Rx 0H CHORD SYS EX Tx 0H Rx 0H MESSAGE SH il LOCAL CONTROL Turns the Local Control for each part on or off When Local Control is set to ON the keyboard of the instru ment controls its own local internal tone generator allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard If you set Local to OFF the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the control lers For example this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument s internal voices and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and or play an external tone genera tor E Clock setting etc CLOCK Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device INTERNAL is the normal Clock set ting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices If you are using the instrument with an external sequ
159. T T CHORD TLVRICST NOTE e on On OFF OFF OFF notation COLOR SIZE Orr SMALL SET UP 9 Displaying only right hand part left hand part notation BJ B B Press the 1 A W 2 A W button to disable display of J the left hand part right hand part Customizing the notation display Display the note name at the left of the note Press the 5 A W NOTE button to display the note name 2 Press the 8 A V SET UP button to call up the detailed setting display 3 Press the 6 W NOTE NAME button to select Fixed Do 4 Press the 8 A OK button to apply the setting Turn on the note colors PSR S900 only Press the 6 A W button to turn the COLOR on BOG About the note colors These colors are fixed for each note and cannot be changed C red D yellow E green F orange G blue A purple and B gray Increase the number of measures in the display You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be dis played part lyrics chords etc Use the 1 A V 4 A W buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 39 40 Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired Press the 8 A V SET UP button to call up the detailed setting display 2 Press the 1A V 6 A V buttons to set the view type Determin
160. TR 2 button for the left hand part recording Recording Styles Multi Pads Press the SONG EXTRA TR STYLE button Recording your performance and the Style Multi Pad playback simultaneously Press the SONG TR 1 TR 2 buttons and the SONG EXTRA TR STYLE button 4 Start recording There are several different ways you can start recording Starting by playing the keyboard If you ve selected the SONG TR 1 TR 2 buttons in step 3 play in the Using the metronome You can record your perfor right hand section of the keyboard page 84 If you ve selected the SONG mance while playing back the EXTRA TR STYLES button in step 3 play in the left hand chord section metronome page 3M However of the keyboard page 110 Recording begins automatically as soon as Ao le Sa you play a note on the keyboard Starting by pressing the SONG IM PLAY PAUSE button If you start recording in this way empty data is recorded until you play a note on the keyboard This is useful for starting a Song with a short one or two beat pick up or lead in Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button In this case the rhythm parts channels of the Style begin playing back and recording starts simultaneously a o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TC c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD 148 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI Press the SONG Bl STOP button
161. TTING i C m VOLUHE 85 mec A REVERB DEPTH 12 CHORUS DEPTH 0 F TOTAL VOLUME RTTEHURTOP OdE 2 DSP HIC OFF TYPE EO TEL DEPTH 127 REUERB CHORUS US TOTAL VOLUHE FATE i FL Fas EE LB ris ES 1 2 Sls 4 Use the A B buttons to select the item parameter page 192 to be set CAUTION 5 Use the 1A W 7 A V buttons to set the value Settings in the TALK SETTING tab display are automatically 3 d to thei h 6 Press the EXIT button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis Sota cen en play However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost 006S 3Sd euoydousIw e BuIsN PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 191 ey e e ko ce N B o o sien e o o S las o0 an 2 192 Talk Setting PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Adjustable Items Parameters in the TALK SETTING Tab Display VOLUME This determines the output volume of the microphone sound PAN This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound REVERB DEPTH This sets the depth of the reverb effects applied to the micro phone sound CHORUS DEPTH This sets the depth of the chorus effects applied to the micro phone sound TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the overal
162. UCH HORMAL EAEZAEZ 2 HODULRTION WHEEL I1wlIw 3 TRANSPOSE RSSIGM MASTER lt TAB gt TOUCH OFF TOUGH LEVEL HARD2 95 HARD1 F NORMAL LEFT RIGHT1 SOFT1 C ON SOFT2 OFF e faa Bz kis PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 4 Press the A button to select the 1 INITIAL TOUCH KEYBORRD7PRHEL LEFT ri R2 f 1 INITIAL TOUCH HORMAL RaRaAEZ 2 MODULATION WHEEL I1Iwlw cI E 2 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN MASTER CI e C 5 TOUCH OFF TOUCH LEUEL fC E HARD2 95 HARDI r T LEFT RIGHTI RIGHT SOFT1 LLON LH O SOFT2 OFF J OFF j OFF A Y FX FAS TAA TAA 1 2 3 4 5 6 d 8 5 Press the 1A V 2A V button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard For details on the touch sensitivity settings see page 33 Throughout this manual arrows are used in the instructions indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions For example the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as FUNCTION D CONTROLLER TAB 4 KEYBOARD PANEL A 1 INITIAL TOUCH PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 29 30 Playing Voices The instrument features a wide variety of exceptionally realistic Voices including piano guitar strings wind instruments and more VOICE buttons page 30 VOICE GUITAR amp ACCORDION amp PERC amp Como osis Borca imone LO baum kr
163. Use the 1A W 8 A V buttons to set the value 6 Press the EXIT button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis play Adjustable Items Parameters in the OVERALL SETTING Tab Display E 3BAND EQ EQ Equalizer is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response The instrument features a high grade three band LOW MID and HIGH digital equalizer function for the microphone sound e Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band e dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB E NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level This effectively cuts off extraneous noise allowing the desired sig nal vocal etc to pass e SW Switch This turns the Noise Gate on or off TH Threshold This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open 188 PSR S900 5700 Owner s Manual Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound il COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics It effectively compresses the signal making soft parts louder and loud parts softer e SW Switch This turns the Compressor on or off TH Threshold This adjusts the input level at which compress
164. Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Press the H S button or the G L button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial Split Point L cannot be set lower than Split Point S and Split Point S cannot be set higher than Split Point L Editing the Volume and Tonal Bal ance of the Style MIXING CONSOLE You can set various mixing related parameters of the Style See Adjustable items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE displays on page 92 Call up the STYLE PART display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE on page 91 and follow the instructions Convenient Music Finder feature Music Finder page 55 is a convenient feature that calls up pre programmed panel settings for Voices Styles etc that match the song or type of music you want to play The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited Searching the Records You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword using the Search function of the Music Finder You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display Press the MUSIC FINDER button to call up the MUSIC FINDER dis play 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the ALL tab The ALL tab display contains all the preset Records Specifying the Split Point by note name Press the 1 A V 4 A V but tons You can specify the Split Point of the Voice and chord sec tion of th
165. according to the chord specified in the left hand sec tion of the keyboard Note that effect to notes played in the Me STANDARD TRIO the 1 5 and Octave settings s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs are not affected by the chord RN S PEN OCTAVE Echo Types SIRUM These types apply echo Multi Assign Type MULTI ASSIGN effects to notes played in This type applies a special effect ee ____ the right hand section of to chords played in the right VL TRILL J the keyboard in time with hand section of the keyboard TT iL a the currently set tempo Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected the Harmony effect is applied to notes played in the right hand section of the keyboard according to the type Canceling the chord sound selected above and the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard for the harmony effect h diae This cancels the sound of the shown below chord played in the chord range of the keyboard letting you Split Point Split Point for Style for keyboard Voice Y Y wr Chord section Left Voice Right 1 for Style Right 2 playback and Voices Harmony effect ACME LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT i ACME LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT hear only the Harmony effect HOLP l 5 i Herb 1 2 Set ACMP
166. adjust the levels and stereo position pan of each Voice to set the opti mum balance and stereo image and lets you set how the effects are applied Basic Procedure Press the MIXING CONSOLE button to call up the MIXING CON SOLE display MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART Em 4 ONG AUTOREVOICE SEB ETP SSe emm s z gt E C 1 3 mm o PanpoT 3 E e pee A a E d ae 2 x a un w tJ OU DJ DS DS DS D 2 Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the relevant setting display For information on the available parameters see the section Adjustable items parameters in the MIXING CONSOLE displays on page 92 3 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button repeatedly to call up the MIX About Parts ING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts See below The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different part displays The part name is indicated at the top of the display The various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following PANEL PART display STYLE PART display SONG CH 1 8 display SONG CH 9 16 display a Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired parameter Instantly setting all parts to the same value Once you ve selected a parame Use the 1A W 8 A V buttons to set the value terin bus 4 you can cally set the same value to all other parts To do this simultaneously hold down one of the A J but ton
167. age life span of this type of bat tery is approximately five years When replacement becomes necessary contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement This product may also use household type batteries Some of these may be rechargeable Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged When installing batteries do not mix batteries with new or with batteries of a different type Batteries MUST be installed correctly Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture Warning Do not attempt to disassemble or incinerate any battery Keep all batter ies away from children Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu lated by the laws in your area Note Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information Disposal Notice Should this product become damaged beyond repair or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end please observe all local state and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead batteries plastics etc If your dealer is unable to assist you please contact Yamaha directly NAME PLATE LOCATION The name plate is located on the bottom of the product The model num ber serial number power requirements etc are located on this plate You should record the model number seri
168. ained below DSP ON OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL DSP button on the panel page 53 PANEL SUSTAIN Determines the sustain level applied to the edited voice when the VOICE CONTROL SUSTAIN button on the panel is turned on page 53 2 DSP DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type Select a type after select ing a category VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type Here you can edit the VARIATION on off status and variation parameter value setting ON OFF The factory programmed assignments are set to variation off for all Voices standard variation of DSP is assigned If you select VARIA TION ON here a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the Voice The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the VALUE menu explained below This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL DSP VARI button on the panel page 53 This button is effective only when the DSP button is on PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter 3 EQ EQ LOW HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands HARMONY Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together Press the PART SELECT RIGHT 1 button before you set it This has the same settings as the display of Selecting the Harmony Echo type on page 89 in step 2 Voice Creating
169. al Some voices have a pitch limit which when reached causes this type of pitch shift The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on This may occur if a USB storage device has been installed to the instrument Installation of some USB stor age device may result a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display To avoid this turn the power on after disconnecting the device Files Folders Some characters of the file folder name are garbled The language settings have been changed Set the appro priate language for the file folder name page 19 An existing file is not shown e The file extension MID etc may have been changed or deleted Manually rename the file adding the appro priate extension on a computer The data contained in the USB storage device is not shown on the instrument itself Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument Rename the file reducing the number of characters to 50 or less How can I stop the demo Press the EXIT button Voice The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound Check whether or not the selected part is turned on page 84 To select the Voice for the right hand key range press the PART SELECT RIGHT 1 button For the Voice to be lay ered in the right hand range press the PART SELECT RIGHT 2 button To select the Voice for the left ha
170. al number and the date of pur chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma nent record of your purchase Model Serial No Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92 BP bottom PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply AC power adaptor Water warning Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument The required e Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into e PSR S900 Use the specified adaptor PA 300B PA 300 or an equivalent any openings recommended by Yamaha only Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands to the instrument or overheating PSR S700 Use the specified adaptor PA 301 PA 300B PA 300 or an Fire warning equivalent recommended by Yamaha only Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may ha
171. allad D A Day s Difference 70 sT Theme 126 I C A Feeling Of Love Tonig MovieBallad AFire Lighter m EIS E A Misty Ballad J A Nickel In The Nickelod RUMBER OF A Night In amp Wonderful L 72 me MUST enn SINLE SEARCH RECORD urnan zo LIS 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 A A A A A A A Y Y Y Y Y Y Ad L3 NewF older a SYSTEM P1 Up MAME cur COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER Convenient Music Finder feature Viewing information about Music Finder records Music Finder Plus The available contents of the se mE Music Finder Plus service are This service provides information on Music Finder records that you may be subject to change interested in It also provides song downloads for your particular instru ment as well as downloadable Music Finder records you can load to your instrument For more details about this service go to the following website http music yamaha com idc 1 Make sure that you re connected to the Internet page 174 and press the MUSIC FINDER button to call up the MUSIC FINDER dis play 2 Usethe 1 A V 5 A V buttons in the display to select the record whose information you want to view on the Web You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial to make the selection After select ing with the dial press ENTER 3 Press the J MUSIC FINDER button to op
172. alternately switches the note selectors at the bottom of the display among three basic note values normal dotted and triplet About velocity Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard The more strongly you play the keyboard the higher the velocity value and the louder the sound The velocity value can be speci fied within a range from 1 to 127 The higher the velocity value the louder the sound becomes PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 155 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 I9 ob c TD Recording Your Performance to MIDI 156 Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data it may not appear exactly the same as shown here About the items which can be selected via the G H I but tons See page 155 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual The explanations here apply to step 7 of the Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 152 2 5 68 10 13 14 16 40 mp S 9 The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers In this example keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display Press the G button to select mp SONG CREATOR NewS
173. am change numbers are one lower since that number system starts from 0 For the GS Voices this feature is not available the program change numbers are not shown PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual seoi eg 1900 YUM 1ueuinujsu INO SUISA Appendix 210 Troubleshooting The instrument does not turn on Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the instrument and the male plug into a proper AC outlet A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off Electrical current is being applied to the instrument This is normal Noise is heard from the instrument s speakers Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing Turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument The letters in the display cannot be read because the display is too bright or dark Use the LCD CONTRAST knob to adjust for optimum visibility Adjust the brightness of the display page 20 The overall volume is too low or no sound is heard The master volume may be set too low Set it to an appropriate level with the MASTER VOLUME dial All keyboard parts are set to off Use the PART ON OFF RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT button to turn it on The volume of the individual parts may be set too low Raise the volume in the BALANCE display page 41 Make sure the desired channel is set to ON page 108 Headphones are connec
174. ameters see below Press the D EXECUTE button to actually enter the edits for each display After the operation is completed you can execute the edition and this but ton changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the results of the edit The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data Save the data in the Style Selection display page 73 QUANTIZE VELOCITY CHANGE Same as in the Song Creator page 165 with the exception of the two additional available parameters below 2 Eighth notes with swing 4 Sixteenth notes with swing Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel accord ing to the percentage specified here BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel SOURCE specifies the first TOP and last LAST measures in the region to be copied DEST specifies the first measure of the destination location to which the data is to be copied BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel N CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power
175. and USB storage device c S Z S o Cc O o a Es ea Note for Prot 2 Orig and Prot 2 Edit Song file operation Make sure to save the Prot 2 Edit Song to the same folder containing its original Prot 2 Orig Song Otherwise the Prot 2 Edit Song cannot be played back Also if you move a Prot 2 Edit Song be sure to move its original Prot 2 Orig Song to the same location folder at the same time Copying Files Folders Copy amp Paste This operation lets you copy a file folder and paste it to another location folder Call up the display containing the file folder you want to copy 2 Press the 3 V COPY button to copy the file folder The pop up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the dis play copy Select files folders 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file folder To cancel the selection press the same A J button again B Selecting all files folders Press the 6 W ALL button to select all files folders indicated on the cur rent display including the other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 W ALL OFF button again 4 Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Copy operation press the 8 V CANCEL button 5 Select the destination tab USER USB to paste the file folder by using the TAB lt gt buttons 6 Press the 4 V PASTE button to paste the fil
176. and part is handled as LOWER Master KBD In this setting the instrument functions as a master keyboard playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices such as a computer sequencer Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1 16 This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer Clock Ext Playback Song or Style synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instru ment s internal clock This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass chord buttons of the accordion This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left hand buttons MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as MIDI Accord 1 above with the exception that the chord bass notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet especially convenient for playing single note bass parts This template lets you play control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for
177. anel Setups Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel control in other words instead of via Registration Memory One Touch Setting Music Finder Song or incoming MIDI data etc 1 Call up the Parameter Lock display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt gt CONFIG 1 B 3 PARAM ETER LOCK 2 Select the desired parameter by using the 1 A W 7 A V buttons then lock it with the 8 A OK button Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup Naming a Panel Setup The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired Press the REGIST BANK and buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display Press one of the A J buttons to select a bank to be edited 3 Press the 8 V EDIT button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Dis play Edit the panel setups Deleting a panel setup Press the 5 W button to delete a panel setup page 75 Renaming a panel setup Press the 1 W button to rename a panel setup page 76 The number above the file name corresponds to the REGISTRATION rz E 11 8 but NewRezist ie NewRezist 3 E NewRezist E NewRezist 8 NewRezist iv NewRegist B NewBank sdnjas jaueg uiojsn Suij e2es pue Sulia sisay DELETE a A A A A A Y Y Y Y 5 Press the 8A UP button to return to the REGISTR
178. apa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 481 53 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 3273 amp YAMAHA Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page English only http music yamaha com homekeyboard Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2007 Yamaha Corporation WH65940 703APAP4 3 02B1 Printed in China
179. armonica TuttiAccordion Country Trio Strings Live Strings Block ChamberStrings 4 way Open Harp Strum Guitar amp Bass Cool PowerLead RockDuet Cool ElectricGtr CountryDuet Perc amp Drum Kit Vibraphone Trill Timpani Tremolo 54 PSR S900 5700 Owner s Manual Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song Music Finder If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don t know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate the convenient Music Finder function can help you out Simply select the desired music genre from among the Music F inder Records and the instrument automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let y ou play in that music style A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one page 114 YAMAHA Oooo 00000 ELSE o ooo e o e c cocco 9 9 p p GO B8BBBBBB o 886 33 2 ee er Oo mili pare I 0000 t JC CC SEN erm Bid The data records of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back 8g Press the MUSIC FINDER button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display 4 TAB mue as ALL 2 Z Nights In A Big City 4U sBisBand 0 Es 40th Symphony PopClassics 50 Second Waltz VienneseWaltz 240 SORT ORDER 69 Summers Long PowerRock 130 CAIA MUSIC FINDER A Boy From The Coun
180. art playback Practice the muted part viewing the Score display BET Adjusting the tempo Refer to page 34 Quickly changing tempo during a performance Tap function The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the TAP TEMPO button twice at the desired tempo 5 Press the SONG 9m STOP button to stop playback 6 Turn the GUIDE button off Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard Press the BALANCE button to call up the volume balance display 2 To adjust the Song volume press the 1 A W button To adjust the keyboard RIGHT 1 volume press the 6 A V button 3 Press the EXIT button to close the volume balance display BALANCE 100 100 85 100 100 100 BALANCE m I 1 1 SONG STYLE 7 HIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 F A A A A A Y Y Y Y Y 2 Bii About keyboard parts Right 1 Right 2 Left See page 84 Other guide functions The initial setting Follow Lights was used in the instructions Muting the Right or Left hand Part Viewing the Score on page 40 There are additional functions in the Guide feature as described below To select a guide function see page 145 For keyboard performance e Any Key This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys D For Karaoke Karao Key This automatically controls the timing of Song playba
181. arts MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third interval is raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major minor chords such as Intros and Endings MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern HARMONIC MINOR HARMONIC MINOR 5th When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major minor chords such as Intros and Endings In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord this table lowers the third sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord the minor third flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone Other notes are not changed Use this
182. ary Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are taken from the PSR S900 and in English Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use This device is capable of using various types formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance As a result this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement and may not be exactly the same as the original This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without limitation all computer software style files MIDI files WAVE data musical scores and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not per mitted under relevant laws Any violation of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES The mandolin and pan flute shown in the displays of
183. ates the event types see below Q Indicates the event values Event types shown on the 1 16 tab display Note The individual note of a Song Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played and the gate time value the length of a note Ctrl Control Change Settings to control the Voice such as volume pan filter and effect depth edited via the Mixing Console described on page 91 etc Prog MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice Program Change P Bnd Pitch Bend Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously A T Aftertouch This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played Event types shown on the CHORD tab display Style Style Tempo tempo Chord chord root chord type on bass chord Sect Accompaniment Style Section Intro Main Fill In Break Ending OnOff On off status for each part channel of the Accompaniment Style CH Vol Volume for each part channel of the Accompaniment Style S Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style Recording Your Performance to MIDI Displaying Specific Types of Events FILTER In the edit displays various types of events are shown It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit This is where the Filter function comes in handy It lets you determine which event types will
184. ause of limitations in the screen space execute the line feed on your computer When the background color is specified in the song data the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual W i IT Displaying the lyrics text on an external TV monitor PSR S900 The lyrics indicated on the display can also be output via the VIDEO OUT terminal l Use an appropriate video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT connec tor of the PSR S900 to the VIDEO INPUT connector on the TV monitor 2 Set the external television video monitor signal NTSC or PAL used by your video equipment if necessary Call up the operation display FOOT PEDAL VIDEO OUT FUNCTION gt JJ UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt SCREEN OUT 2 Press the 1 A W button to select the external television video monitor signal Rear panel of the instrument Convenient Functions for Karaoke Adjusting the tempo gt page 34 PSR S900 S700 Transpose gt See below Applying Effects to Your Voice gt See below Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice gt page 60 PSR S900 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch Vocal CueTIME gt page 146 Transpose You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low e Transposing the Song key up Press the TRANSPOSE button e Transposing the Song key down Press the TRANSPOSE button e Resetting the transposition
185. ay Overwriting an existing record Press the 8 A OK button If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above the record is added to the FAVORITE display When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display the record is overwritten 114 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Convenient Music Finder feature Saving the Record The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and addi tionally created records as a single file Keep in mind that individual records panel setups cannot be handled as separate files Call up the Save display MUSIC FINDER TAB lt 4 gt ALL 7 A W FILES 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the location for saving USER USB 3 Press the 6 V button to save the file page 73 All records are saved together as a single file se Ais jueuirueduioooy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 115 un Q gt E A c E Z G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO Inn cO c GS o0 c B oO e 9 ob c 5 116 Convenient Music Finder feature N CAUTION Selecting REPLACE auto matically deletes all your orig inal records from internal memory and replaces them with the factory Music Finder data When you download a file to delete all Music Finder records from the web page 117 and execute it make sure that all important data has been archived to another locati
186. be shown in the edit displays Press the H FILTER button in the edit displays 2 Select the event type by using the 2 A V 5 A V buttons 3 Checkmark show or remove the checkmark for the selected item by using the 6 A V 7 A V buttons H ALL ON Checkmarks for all event types I NOTE CHORD Selects only NOTE CHORD data DI INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes In other words this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa 4 Press the EXIT button to execute the settings Pressing the C E buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below MAIN cuocersi Call up the Main Filter display CIR CHO inito Call up the Control Change Filter display STYLEE ntes Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display Editing System Exclusive Events SYS EX The explanations here apply to the SYS EX tab display in step 4 of the Basic Edit ing Operation on page 162 From this display you can edit recorded System Exclusive events which do not belong to a specific channel such as tempo and beat time signature The opera tions here are basically the same as those in the section Editing Note or Chord Events on page 167 System Events ScBar Score Start Bar Determines the top measure of a Song Tempo Determines the tempo value Time Time Signature Determines the time signature Key Key
187. beb R83 ETT ae ky A DEPTH 64 OFFSET 64 F A LEFT 1 RIGHT1 RIGHT2 1 PORTANENTO TIME 0 C o H CONH sE B a C 7 OUCH SENSE PART OCTAVE HONOZ PORTANENTO Ti UOLUME DEPTH OFFSET LEFT R17R2 4 POLY TINE 64 64 1 1 P EIEII n TITITIE Heel L Cas FSS rsa rsa rsa rsa A As necessary use the A B buttons to select the item parameter to be edited 5 Use the 1 A V 8 A V buttons to edit the Voice Voice Creating Voice Set Editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices compared to other Voices For instructions on editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices see page 103 S i ga Q g 2 i oa g 2 a m 2 oa E 2 N CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings the settings will be lost If you wish to store the settings here make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 99 wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c Dw 2 Voice Creating Voice Set The available parameters differ depending on the Voice Changes to velocity curve according to Touch sensitivity TOUCH SENSE DEPTH Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth with Off set set to 64 Actual Velocity for tone generator Depth 127 twice
188. button Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 8 buttons to register your settings It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or green Buttons that are lit in red or green already contain the panel setup data Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button lamp lights in green or red will be erased and replaced by the new settings Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps 1 5 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups registration Memory When recalling registration set ups you can also select the items to be recalled or not even if you selected all items when registering page 138 About the lamp status Qin cue no data registered On green data registered but not currently selected On red data registered and currently selected Deleting an unneeded panel setup See page 137 Deleting all eight current panel setups To delete all the eight current panel setups turn the POWER button ON while holding the B5 key right most B key on the key board PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 135 sdnjas jaueg uiojsn Suij e2es pue Buas un 2 2 Z 9 N T S a E o wn 23 V o0 T O D a ae c S o0 c 9 L 2 o I ce Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Registration Memory data compatibility In general Registration Memory data Bank files is compatible among
189. button to save the edited EQ type page 73 Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved When recalling the saved EQ type use the same procedure as in step 6 98 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Voice Creating Voice Set The PSR S900 S700 has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices Once you ve created a Voice you can save it as a User Voice to the USER USB display for future recall The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other Voices Basic Procedure Select the desired Voice other than an Organ Flutes Voice page 31 2 Press the 6 A VOICE SET button to call up the VOICE SET display VOICE LEFT USBI USE sArt Sweet CORRES SopranoSax S Art Sweet 4 BigBandSax 5 73 AltoSax Rok Sweet 6 JazzTenor 4 TenorSax Sweet Sweet 4 BalladTenor 4 GrowlSax Sweet Live 5 23PopTenor 28 SaxSection L Saxophone lt i UOICESET INFO uP HANE CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER DENO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 A A A v Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 3 Use the TAB lt gt buttons to call up the relevant setting display For information on the available parameters see the Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays on page 100 s 3 VOICE SET Saxophone COMMON T
190. ce and Voice Combination etc MIXING CONSOLE 144 Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions 145 Selecting the Guide Function Type 145 Recording Your Performance to MIDI 147 Recording Methods csceceesseeeeeesteeeeeeeneeeeees 147 Editing a Recorded SONG sese 162 Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet 171 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet 171 Accessing the Special Website 172 Operations in the Special Website 172 Scrolling the Display srties 172 Following Links 2 cerei eerte tis 173 Entering Characters esses 173 Return to the Previous Web Page 173 Refreshing a Web Page Canceling Loading of a Web Page eTEPPL oeer 174 Purchasing and Downloading Data 174 Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages 175 Opening a Bookmarked Page 176 About the Internet Settings Display 178 Changing the Home Page eeeeeeeee 181 Initializing Internet Settings esses 182 Glossary of Internet Terms 183 Using a Microphone PSR S900 184 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters 184 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony MpDEM asassaS 187 Talk Setting oer ede
191. channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1 16 tab display how ever they cannot be changed in the Style Creator Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display In the Style Creator the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited delete copy or move You can switch between the two by press ing the F button However Chord Lyrics and System Exclusive data cannot be entered N D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu 122 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual Style Assembly ASSEMBLY Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns channels from existing internal Styles Select the basic Style then call up the display for Style Assembly The operation steps are the same as steps 1 4 in Realtime recording page 119 In step 4 select the ASSEMBLY tab Select the desired section Intro Main Ending etc for your new Style Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons INTRO IMAIN ENDINCG etc on the panel Change the section as desired by using the 6 A W 7 A W buttons and execute the operation by pressing the 8 A OK button o B Cc o D 2 1 Indicates the channels that make up the section STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat ASSEMBLY ILUS 0553898 4 3 aO 00 RHYTHM CHOR
192. chord patterns from the Cool8Beat Style combining the various elements to create one Style 70 s 8Beat Cool8Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Rhythm 2 Bass Bass 60 s Rock1 mess NN Chord 1 Rhythm 1 Chord 1 Rhythm 1 Chord 2 Rhythm 2 Chord 2 Rhythm 2 Pad gt Bass Pad Bass Phrase 4 Chord 1 Phrase 1 Chord 1 Phrase 2 en Phrase 2 Chord 2 Pad Pea Phrase 1 Phrase Ne Realtime Recording BASIC Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one by one using realtime recording Realtime Recording Characteristics Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a loop and Style recording is also done using loops For example if you start recording with a two measure main section the two measures are repeatedly recorded Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition loop letting you record while hearing previously recorded material Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data without deleting the original data In Style recording the recorded data is not deleted except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear page 121 and Delete page 120 For example if you start recording with a two measure MAIN section the two measures are repeated many times Notes that you record wi
193. ck pressing and holding the Foot Pedal 2 instantly enables Punch In recording while releasing the pedal stops recording Punch Out You can press and release the Foot Pedal 2 as often as you want during playback to punch in out of overwrite recording Note that the current function assignment of the Foot Pedal 2 is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In Out function is set to ON Editing Channel Events CHANNEL The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 162 un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c pz eG o 9 ob c TD Use the A B buttons to select the Edit menu page 165 2 Use the 1A V 8 A V buttons to edit the data For information on the available parameters see page 165 N CAUTION 3 Press the D EXECUTE button to execute the operation for the cur The recorded Song data will rent display be lost if you ds ies After the operation with the exception of the SETUP menu display is com Bong or turn tie power to eue pleted this button changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data instrument off without exe r xps j cuting the Save operation if you are not satisfied with the Operation results The Undo function only page 73 has one level only the immediate operation can be undone 164 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI 4 Press the I SAVE button to call up the
194. ck to match your singing a convenient feature for singing along with your keyboard performance Vocal CueTIME PSR S900 This automatically controls the timing of the accompaniment to match the melody pitch of your singing allow ing you to practice singing with the correct pitch PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 41 42 Practicing the Left hand Part TRACK 2 Viewing the Score 12 Follow the same steps as in Practice the right hand part TR 1 on page 40 P 9 P 3 Press the TR 2 button to mute the left hand part The indicator of the TR 2 L button goes out You can now play that part by yourself A Press the SONG gt at PLAY PAUSE button to start playback and practice the muted part 5 Press the SONG 9m STOP button to stop playback 6 Turn the GUIDE button off Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult to play phrases Playing Back a Song Repeatedly Select a Song page 36 2 Press the REPEAT button to turn on Repeat playback 3 Press the SONG gt H PLAY PAUSE button to start playback The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG ll STOP button 4 Press the SONG B STOP button to stop playback 5 Press the REPEAT button to turn off Repeat playback Spec
195. ct a specified file in the USB storage device by pressing the USB button USB B STYLE A UJ un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i S o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style you can play back the Style and select the method of playback Use the 6 A W 7 A W PLAY TYPE buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display Any chan nels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously e OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display Editing the Created Style You can edit the Style you ve created by using Realtime recording Step recording and or Style Assembly Basic Operation for Editing Styles Select a Style to be edited Call up the operation display FUNCTION F DIGITAL REC MENU 3 Call up the Style Creator Edit display by pressing the B button Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select a tab e Changing the Rhythmic Feel GROOVE gt See page 125 These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic f
196. cts caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the RIGHT1 part 7 A V button Sets whether the effects caused by the MODULATION Wheel will be applied or not to the RIGHT2 part Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds Press the METRONOME button to start the metronome 2 To stop the metronome press the METRONOME button again METRONOME Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound E Adjusting the Metronome Tempo Press the TEMPO 4 button to call up the pop up tempo setting display MAIN TRANSPOSE 0 UPPER OCTAVE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 L F 2 4 4 J 128 SONG lae RIGHT W NewSong CATHAN Live RIGHTZ TEMPO 1 4 120 Suraight b 9 Straight8Pop SS E Gtr16BtCut1 REGIST exe NewBank BRLRNCE 100 100 95 100 100 100 L SONG STYLE H PAD MIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 2 Press the TEMPO buttons to set the tempo Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value You can also use the DATA ENTRY dial to adjust the value To reset the tempo press the TEMPO but tons simultaneously Bid About the Tempo display The number in the display indicates how many quarter note beats there are in one minute The range is between 5 and 500 The higher the value the faster the tempo 3
197. d For details on the Harmony Echo types see page 89 An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn the effect on and off page 194 Turn the Harmony Echo button on 2 Turn on both the ACMP button and SYNC START button page 47 and make sure that the RIGHT 1 part is on page 30 3 Play a chord with your left hand to start the style page 47 and play some notes in the right hand range of the keyboard Split Point section In this example harmony notes in the scale of C major the chord played in the left hand are automatically added to the notes played in the Chord section right hand range of the keyboard You can also use the Harmony effect with the style stopped with the Stop Accompaniment function page 109 Simply hold down a chord with your left hand and play a melody with your right Since the Har mony effect is added by detecting chords if you play a melody with your right hand before playing any chord no Harmony effect is added to the notes Try out Harmony Echo with some of the voices below Many of the voices have been automatically set to play certain Harmony Echo types that match the particular voice Try out some of the voices below playing chords with your left hand and melodies with your right and listen to the various Harmony and Echo effects Category Voice Name Harmony Echo Type Piano Live GrandPiano Standard Trio Accordion amp H
198. d file folder 4 Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file folder selection To cancel the Rename operation press the 8 W CANCEL button c S Z S o eo O o a w ea 5 Input the name characters of the selected file or folder page 77 The renamed folder file appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order 6 Press the 8 A OK button to actually enter the new name Selecting Custom Icons for Files Shown at the Left of File Name You can select custom icons for files shown at the left of file name 4 Operations are the same as the above Renaming Files Folders section 5 Press the 1 Y ICON button to call up the ICON display 6 Select the icon by using the A J buttons or 3 A W 5 A V but tons The ICON display includes several pages Press the TAB 44 gt buttons to select different pages To cancel the operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 7 Press the 8 A OK button to apply the selected icon co Press the 8A OK button to actually enter the new name 76 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Creating a New Folder This operation lets you create new folders Folders can be created named and organized as desired making it easier to find and select your original data 2 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to create a new fo
199. d for the Vocal Harmony 1 16 Chords are detected from note data in the specified song chan nel VOCAL RANGE Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony depending on your voice Normal Normal setting Low Setting for lower voice This setting is also appropriate for growl ing and shouting High Setting for higher voice This setting is also appropriate for sing ing close to the microphone E MIC The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled e MUTE When set to ON the microphone sound is turned off e VOLUME Adjusts the output volume of the microphone sound e e ko ce N B o o sien e o e S las o0 C an 2 190 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual Talk Setting Talk Setting This function lets you have special settings for making announcements between songs separate from the settings for your singing performance Press the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button to call up the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY display MIC SETTING OCAL HARMONY pmo 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIC EFFECT OFF VOCAL HARHOHY OH 1 MIC SETTING G VOCAL HARMONY yo m a NN 8 000 VOGAL TALE HICEERECI HARHOHY rm l OFF 2 Press the I MIC SETTING button to call up the MICROPHONE SET TING display 3 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the TALK SETTING tab display 3 Ta TAB 4 MICROPHONE SE
200. d played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice regardless of the selected Style OTS Link Timing This applies to the OTS Link function page 51 This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION A D change The OTS LINK button must be on Real Time One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button EET One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure after you press a MAIN VARIATION button Next Bar Synchro Stop Window This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled When the SYNC STOP button is turned on and this is set to a value other than OFF this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal letting you release the keys and still have the Style play In other words if you release the keys sooner than the time set here the Synchro Stop function works Style Touch Turns touch response for the Style playback on off When this is set to ON the Style volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard Data that is recorded when recording a Song Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to STYLE and only the chord data w
201. d to follow all safety precautions EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name trademark and or ID numbers have been altered defaced exchanged removed or to failures and or damages that may occur as a result of 1 Neglect abuse abnormal strain modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity 2 Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product an authorized service center or an authorized service representative of Yamaha 3 This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U S A the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U S A or in any other country Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below Serial Sales Slip Purchased from Date Retailer YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS DO NOT MAIL FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instruc tions contained in this manual meets FCC require ments Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the
202. ded file in an e mail message make sure the file size is small enough to be sent The following sounds can be recorded Internal tone generator of the instrument Keyboard parts Right 1 Right 2 Left Song parts Style parts Input from a microphone guitar or other instrument via the MIC LINE IN jack Input from another audio device such as a CD player MP3 player or the like via the MIC LINE IN jack BET Songs protected by copyright such as preset songs and the metronome sound cannot be recorded The recorded data using this function is saved as Stereo WAV data 44 1 kHz sample rate 16 bit resolution Recording Your Performance as Audio Now try recording a performance of your singing along with Song playback with a connected microphone The maxi mum amount of recording time is 80 minutes though this may differ depending on the capacity of the particular USB storage device 1 set the desired Voice etc which you want to use for your performance and connect a microphone For information on setting the Voice see page 30 for connecting a microphone see page 57 Here you ll also see by example how to sing along with accompaniment Style playback To set the Style go on to step 6 page 48 2 Connect the USB storage device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal BET To record your performance by USB Audio Recorder use the compatible USB flash memory When the USB flash memory is not compatible it is not likely
203. dedeneddcedanceteeens eniinn Figa PIG ice tuned en Ehe ute rei rE Pitch Bend Wheel Portamento Time Practice Function ERA S A EE Em PrO siana PROPERTY Prot 1 Prot 2 Edit Prot 2 OMS diieiaiso pto e HET EE PURE MAJOR PURE MINOR PYTHAGOREAN Q QUANTIZE Q ick Recording en tern rr rete teas 147 QUICKSTART creaire esea ara aE e EN RPG ME HEN RES 143 R RANDOM Wer EP Realtime Recording REC MODE RECEIVE e M M Record Record Song Record Style REGISTRATION MEMORY REGISTRATION SEQUENCE REPEAT MODE Repertoire Mq ca Rewind Ld Save Music Finder SCALE TUNE Score Search Music Finder Records Section Set SESSION reroror cavete esee Nee eue dE eue EE ome sunu EN EU tud coke Set the polarity of the pedal SPX LestuitisendicadeP e irade A E E inva x Ue EN Cobre SINGLE FINGER 4d trice Sencem ed pev svi e tect videt en SMF Standard MIDI file SONE an ieran SONG CH 1 8 9 16 Song channels sseni rtr eere tei er aaa SOUND Sound effects STANDBY ON switch Step Recording i torres T Nep dM Style zbiibeteo A RNR Style Assembly arsine teretes Style Change Behavior sse Style Creator Style File Format SFF ertet STYPE PART iiie esteem ober tps de eiat lene STYLE SETTINC SPLIT POINT Style StF CFUF e 1er rre a Poste erts Style Touch
204. ders VOICECRIGHTI PRESET USER _ USB1 Live arom ae warmcrana Live iC Oct Piano2 ms CP80 IW BrightPiano me_Pisno ooo VOICESET INFO UP VOICEIRIGHT1 N 1 Flutes Woodwind is E Piano le Strings 5 Trumpet lc Guitar amp Bass lc Brass Saxophone l3 Accordion VOICESET INFO UP lon Harpsichord lon GrandHarpsi LT MNT ee HonkyTonk HANE CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER DENO GECI CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER DEMO This display shows the 8 Voice files in a folder The next highest level in this case folder is shown Each folder shown in this display contains appropriately Y categorized Voices Selecting a file saved to the USB storage device You can also select a specified file in the USB storage device by pressing the USB button USB A SONG B STYLE F VOICE G MULTI PAD A 0 uoneiodQ oiseg The number of pages shown var ies depending on the selection display of the Voices Songs Styles Press the corresponding button to P1 P2 in the dis play When other pages follow the NEXT button appears and for the previous page the PREV button appears PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 71 c S Z o eo O o a Es ea 72 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display The indications USB 1 USB 2 etc will be displayed depending on the nu
205. duct included in the cate gories listed below that the product will be free of defects in materials and or workmanship for the periods indicated This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and or workmanship Yamaha and or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date Yamaha will subject to the terms of this warranty supply these parts without charge However charges for labor and or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MER CHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and or the exclusion of incidental or consequent
206. e The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal LEAD GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change This is available when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off The higher the value the more feminine the harmony voice becomes The lower the value the more masculine the voice LEAD PITCH CORRECT This parameter is only effective when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off When Smooth or Hard is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps UPPER GENDER THRESH OLD Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch LOWER GENDER THRESH OLD UPPER GENDER DEPTH Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD The higher the value the more feminine the harmony voice becomes The lower the value the more masculine the voice LOWER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD The higher the value the more feminine the harmony voice becomes The lower the value the more masculine the voice VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound
207. e Four different Section Fill ins are FADE IN OUT OTS LINK AUJO FILL IN available o JC ENDING rit INTRO MAIN VARIATION die STYLE CONTROL BREAK o o o o o Ml A D Tk II o I Channel RHY RHY2 BASS CHDI GHD2 PAD PHRI PHR2 On On on On On on On On Creating a Style You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style The created Styles can also be edited page 124 E Realtime Recording gt See page 119 This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument You can select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want to create and then re record parts of the Style as desired or you can create a new Style from scratch E Step Recording gt See page 122 This method is like writing music notation on paper since it allows you to enter each note or individually and specify its length This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument since you can enter each event manually E Style Assembly gt See page 123 This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various pat terns from the internal preset Styles For example if you want to create your own original 8 beat Style you could take rhythm patterns from the 70 s 8Beat Style use the bass pattern from 60 s Rock1 Style and import the
208. e the quicker the attack DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level a slightly lower level than maximum The lower the value the quicker the decay RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released The lower the value the quicker the decay Level Sustain level reATTACK 4 DECAY I RELEASE Time t t me Key on Key off Voice Creating Voice Set PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 101 s 210A Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c uu 2 Voice Creating Voice Set Vibrato A quavering vibrating sound effect that is produced by regu larly modulating the pitch of the Voice 102 PSR 5900 5700 Owner s Manual VIBRATO Pitch Time DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset EFFECT EQ 1 REVERB DEPTH CHORUS DEPTH DSP DEPTH REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb page 95 depth CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus page 95 depth DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP page 95 depth If you want to re select the DSP type you can do so in the DSP menu expl
209. e folder The folder file copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order 74 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Moving Files Cut amp Paste This operation lets you cut a file and paste it to another location folder Call up the display containing the file you want to move 2 Press the 2 V CUT button to cut the file The pop up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display ERNB setect rites 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the desired file To cancel the selection press the same A J button again E Selecting all files Press the 6 W ALL button to select all files indicated on the current dis play including the other pages To cancel the selection press the 6 W ALL OFF button again uoneiodQ aiseg 4 Press the 7 V OK button to confirm the file selection To cancel the Cut operation press the 8 W CANCEL button 5 Select the destination tab USER USB to which the file is to be pasted by using the TAB lt gt buttons 6 Press the 4 V PASTE button to paste the file The file moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order Deleting Files Folders This operation lets you delete a file folder Call up the display containing the file folder you want to delete
210. e for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist IMPORTANT The louder the sound the shorter the time period before damage occurs Some Yamaha products may have benches and or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso ries Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fix tures where applicable are well secured BEFORE using Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only No other uses are recommended NOTICE Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works when the unit is operating as designed are not covered by the manufacturer s warranty and are therefore the owners responsibility Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ mentally friendly We sincerely believe that our products and the produc tion methods used to produce them meet these goals In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law we want you to be aware of the following Battery Notice This product MAY contain a small non rechargeable battery which if applicable is soldered in place The aver
211. e keyboard by using STYLE in the display and you can specify the Split Point of the left and right Voices by using LEFT PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 111 s J 5 yu wuedwo22y ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea BuIA Convenient Music Finder feature 3 Press the 6 A SEARCH 1 button to call up the Search display MUSIC FINDER ALL EIUS Z Nishts In A Big City dUsBisBand E 40th Symphony PopClassics 50 Second Waltz VienneseWaltz SORT ORDER 69 Summers Long PowerRock 130 FRAO A Boy From The Country Bluegrass 150 A Bridge To Cross Troub PowerBallad 78 A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 76 A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad 98 A Day s Difference 70 sT Theme 126 0 A Feeling Of Love Tonig MovieBallad AFire Lighter Unplugged A Misty Ballad CoolJazzBallad d 4 A Nickel In The Nickelod Dixieland A Night In A Wonderful L 6 80rchestral 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A A a fa fa A A Y Y v v v Y Y Clear the search criteria 4 Enter the search criteria To clear the entered Music Key MUSIC TINDER SEARCH word Style press the F G H CLEAR button MUSIC KEYHORD rwe 1 1 1 LIE 274 3 4 4 4 6 8 OTHER INE FAVORITE SERRCH1 SERRCH2 TENE seme GENRE FROM TO SA Beg puma Fi Fis arias Search by song title or music genre MUSIC or keyword Press the A MUSIC B KEYW
212. e recording as soon as you play the keyboard m 2 PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indi cated Punch In measure then starts overwrite recording at that 3 point You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the 3 A V button 2 g 2 a rm E PUNCH OUT settings 2 2 REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped 2 2 PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as E the Punch Out point This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure set with the corresponding display button at which point recording stops and normal playback continues This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the 6 A W buttons PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 163 Recording Your Performance to MIDI Examples of re recording with various Punch In Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In Out function The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight measure phrase are re recorded PUNCH IN setting Original data PUNCH OUT setting LL m p mq Ap E cq p yp N
213. e volume RESP Affects both the attack and release page 101 portion of the sound increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release based on the FOOTAGE controls The higher the value the slower the swell and release VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On Off and Vibrato Depth on the previous page MODE The MODE control selects between two modes FIRST and EACH In the FIRST mode attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously while the first notes are held any subse quently played notes have no attack applied In the EACH mode attack is applied equally to all notes 4 2 2 3 2 These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice The 4 2 2 3 and 2 controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound volume LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack The longer the graphic c bar the longer the decay El e g EFFECT EQ a Same parameters as in the VOICE SET EFFECT EQ tab display explained on a page 102 a aa Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets effects etc 2 Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the VOICE SET displays including effects and EQ Usually these settings are automatically called up when
214. ects PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 95 sadlo Sunip3 pue Bunea Surs wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c Dw 2 96 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Re selecting the Effect block category and type Use the 1 A V 3 A V but tons The re selected effect con figuration is displayed at the upper left side box in the display Effect Return Level Determines the level or amount of effect applied This is set for all parts or channels PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 7 8 If you want to edit the effect parameters go on to the next operation Use the 5 A W 6 A V buttons to select the effect CATEGORY Use the 7 A V 8 A V buttons to select the effect TYPE E Editing and Saving the effect 9 Press the F PARAMETER button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters MIXING CONSOLE VOLZVOICE FILTER EFFECT TYPE EDIT TUNE BLOCK DSPALRIGHT1I PARA HETER A CATEGORY REVERB r cu TYPE HRLL3 B G CATEGORY c H DELAY ER KRRROKE D CHORUS i FLANGER C E PHASER J DISTORTION HAH DYHAMIC ROTARY SP O If you have selected one of the DSP 2 4 effect blocks in step 5 You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter To select the standard type of parameters press the B button To select its varia
215. ects above select the desired category then select the desired voice Playing different Voices simultaneously The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously page 84 Layering two different Voices This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard You can play different Voices with the left and right hands For example you can set up the keyboard to play the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard You can adjust the touch response of the instrument how the sound responds to the way you play the keys The touch sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices Call up the operation display FUNCTION D CONTROLLER gt TAB lt 4 b gt KEYBOARD PANEL A 1 INITIAL TOUCH LEFT R1 R2 PnmucETEm lv wly Press the 1 A W 2 A V buttons to specify the touch response Se pw wr HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume Best for players with a heavy touch HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for high volume NORMAL Standard touch response SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light play ing strength Best for players with a light touch BEG This setting does not
216. ed or noisy The volume may be turned up too high Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate This may be caused by certain effects Try canceling all unnecessary effects especially distortion type effects page 95 Adjust the sound using the 8 A W TOTAL GAIN ADJ buttons from the display shown in step 6 of Editing and Saving the selected EQ page 98 if you are using the Master EQ Some filter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display page 101 can result in distorted sound Adjust these settings if necessary Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the Filter display of the Mixing Console Adjust the Har monic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display page 93 The sound does not change when replacing Voices with the Song Auto Revoice feature Depending on the particular Song data there are some instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect even when replacing Voices The sound of the Voice doesn t change even when editing the Voice Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depend ing on the original settings of the Voice Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot be selected for Step recording e This is normal Style playback does not start Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure this is set to INTERNAL page 207
217. edure on page 91 In step 2 select the EQ tab A Use the A B buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your perfor mance music style or environment PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 97 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE If you want to edit the EQ parameters go on to the next operation E Editing and Saving the selected EQ 5 Press the F EDIT button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display MIXING CONSOLE PANEL PART VOL VOICE FILTER TUNE EFFECT SONG STYLE H PAD LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 6 Use the A B buttons to select a preset EQ type wn D 2 e gt of MIXING CONSOLE VOL UOICE FILTER TUNE EFFECT WASTER EQEDIT c JB z 6 Gm NOME F CI CONCERT BD aS 8 u RUXOUT PA e C Z S c gra fu L1 P 9 d p T Em wn n p E j 7 Use the 3 A V 7 A V buttons to boost or cut each of the five bands Use the 8 A W button to boost or cut all the five bands at the same time 8 Adjust the Q bandwidth and the FREQ center frequency of the band selected in step 7 Bandwidth also called Shape or Q Use the 1 A V button The higher the value of Q the narrower the band width FREQ center frequency Use the 2 A V button The available FREQ range is different for each band 9 Press the H or I STORE 1 or 2
218. eel of your created Style e Editing Data for each Channel CHANNEL gt See page 127 The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize set tings for each channel in the Style data e Making Style File Format Settings PARAMETER gt See page 128 For playback of your created Style you can decide how notes will be con verted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the chord section of the keyboard 5 Edit the selected Style 124 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Style Creator Changing the Rhythmic Feel GROOVE The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of Basic Operation for Editing Styles page 124 Press the A B button to select the edit menu page 126 STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat CURSORS 1 3 8 NE GROOVE E5538 45 3 303 BAR 1 n 1 GROOUE TENE 2 pvnnitics dE S Wem a Groove lets you change the swins feel Em of the rhythm G for example from 8 beat to shuffle c H J mm e 4 ORIGINAL BEAT E BEAT CONVERTER SHING FINE J 16BEAT 12 A 2 PUSH A 12BEAT B 2 PUSH B 24BERT t 2 PUSH 2 Use the 1 A W 8 A V buttons to edit the data For details on editable parameters see page 126 3 Press the D EXECUTE button to actually enter the edits for each display After the operation is completed you can e
219. en the Web page MUSIC FINDER STYLE 2 Nights In A Big City 0 LSORTBY A s0th symphony LE F 50 Second Waltz a B 9 ASCENDING G A TZ 5 0 lae To Cross Troul ADD T c A Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening H A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad D A Day s Difference 70 sT Theme 126 GENO LOCEK I A Feeling Of Love Tonig MovieBallad A Fire Lighter Unplugged1 er TEST L EC A Misty Ballad CoolJazzBallad 3 A Nickel In The Nickelod Disieland A Night In A Wonderful L 6 80rchestral 2 Y 7 EXIT A 4 Press the EXIT button to exit the browser screen and return to the MUSIC FINDER display se Ais JuauUuedWosoy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 117 un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu 118 Style Creator PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Style Creator You can create your own styles recording them by yourself or by combining the internal Style data The created Styles can be edited Style Structure Styles are made up of fifteen different sections and each section has eight separate channels With the Style Creator feature you can create a Style by separately recording the channels or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles Styl
220. encer MIDI computer or other MIDI device and you want to syn chronize it to that device set this parameter to the appropriate setting MIDI USB 1 or USB 2 In this case make sure that the external device is connected prop erly e g to the instrument s MIDI IN terminal and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal When this is set for control by an external device MIDI USB 1 or USB 2 the Tempo is indicated as Ext in the Main display TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock F8 transmission on or off When set to OFF no MIDI clock or Start Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back MIDI Settings RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument s transpose setting page 61 is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI START STOP Determines whether incoming FA start and FC stop messages affect Song or Style playback E MESSAGE SW e SYS EX The Tx setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Sys tem Exclusive messages on or off The Rx setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclu sive messages generated by external equipment on or off CHORD SYS EX The Tx setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data chord detect root and type on or off The Rx setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off TRANSMIT display M
221. ent show you the notes to play Chord Tutor function 1 cai up the operation display FUNCTION C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING TAB CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the 6 A V button to select the root note STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING CHORD FINGERING CHORD TUTOR FINGERED MULTI FINGER Both Sinsle Finger and Fingered are CHORD HRHE C Possible For Sinsle Finger press the white black key s gt closest to the root note FINGERING TYPE SINGLE FINGER GHORD SETTING TEERCT 2 3 Press the 7 A V 8 A V button to select the chord type The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display FINGERED FINGERED OH BASS BEG The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered no matter which fingering type is selected page 107 50 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual y i I Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings Voices or effects etc for the currently selected Style with the touch of a single button If you ve already decided which Style you wish to use you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you select a Style page 46 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 4 buttons Not onl
222. ently selected web page registered to the selected book mark is shown below the list 2 Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the 3 A W ADD button BOOKMARK BOOKMARK LIST PAGE TITLE Yamaha Website 1 CONTROL MEHU Sams S Bs 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 oro 5 BJ bj b pg v v Y vj v bv v jeuoju au O A941 00Z5 006S 3Sd 24 Sunoeuuo PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 175 Operations in the Special Website 3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the 1 A Y A V button BOOKMARK BOOKMARK LIST a a A oo C 4 To save the bookmark press the 7 A V EXECUTE button or press the 8 A V CANCEL button to cancel 5 To return to the browser press the 8 A W CLOSE button Opening a Bookmarked Page Press the 44 V BOOKMARK button to call up the Bookmark dis play 2 Press the 1A V A V button to select the desired bookmark BOOKMARK BOOKMRRK LIST Yamaha Website 1 PAGE TITLE PH MENU a M EEE aE 3 4 5 6 T 8 A A A A A A v Y Y Y Y Y 3 Press the 2A V VIEW button to open the page of the selected bookmark 176 PSR S900 5700 Owner s Manual Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly
223. ep evenly spaced in pitch This is the most commonly used tuning in music today PURE MAJOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale PURE MINOR especially for triad chords root third fifth You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies such as choirs and a cappella singing PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths which are collapsed into a single octave The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads MEAN TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale by making the major third interval more in tune It was especially popu lar from the 16th century to the 18th century Handel among others used this scale WERCKMEISTER KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger sys tems which were themselves improvements on the mean tone and Pythagorean scales The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven and even now it is often used when per forming period music on the harpsichord ARABIC Use these tunings when playing Arabic music Tuning values for Preset Scales base note C in cents C C D Eb E F F G Ab A Bb B PEE eeu 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PURE MAJOR o 297
224. er or the instrument freezes turn the power to the instrument off and restart the computer Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST ter minal exit from any power saving mode of the computer such as suspended sleep standby and quit any open appli cation software also turns off the power to the instrument Execute the following before turning the power to the instru ment off or unplugging the USB cable to from the instrument computer Quit any open application software on the computer Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song While a USB device is connected to the instrument you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations When turning the power of the instrument off then on again or when alternately connecting dis connecting the USB cable 2 NOTE The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub For information on setting up your sequence software refer to the owner s manual of the relevant software Connection by MIDI terminals There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI to a computer If you have a MIDI interface built into your computer connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the comp
225. eration display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt SCREEN OUT 2 Select the video equipment standard NTSC or PAL by using the 1A V 2A V but tons Select the contents of the Video Out signal the current display contents LCD or lyrics text LYRICS TEXT by using the 3A V 4A V buttons UTILITY nu sco NES CEM SCREEN OUT 30 CELL GC ENELULG E 365130 Select the desired output monitor type NTSC or PAL MONITOR SCREEN TYPE CONTENT NTSC LYRICS TEXT MENU NES 1 2 388 4 5 6 ra 8 A A A A A Y Y Y v Y 194 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Connecting a Microphone or Guitar O MIC LINE IN Jack PSR S900 By connecting a microphone to the MIC LINE IN jack standard 1 4 phone jack you can enjoy singing along with Song playback KARAOKE or with your own per formance The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built in speakers For instructions on connecting see page 57 Please note that when con necting devices of high output level make sure to set the LINE MIC switch to LINE MIN Q MAX O MIC INPUT LINE IN VOLUME lI LINE MIC Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller FOOT PEDAL 1 2 jacks Two FOOT PEDAL jacks can be used via the following functions at the initial default setting factory setting FOOT PEDAL 1 jack
226. es which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left hand right hand part This set ting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right and left hand parts are assigned automatically setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the FUNCTION LEFT CH RIGHT CH s SONG SETTING i 1 16 Assigns the specified MIDI channel 1 16 to each of the left and right hand parts OFF LEFT CH only No channel assignment This disables display of the left hand key range This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song at the stopped position This menu REY SIGNATURE is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation letting you shift or correct the timing QUANTIZE of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the song Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the fol lowing three types The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in Display the note name at the left of the note step 1 is set to ON A B C Note names are indicated as letters C D E F G A B FIXED DO NOTE NAME Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language The language i
227. eset Style name For details on the character istics see page 106 When the 7 A REPERTOIRE button is pressed after selecting a Style you can call up the custom panel settings for voices and tempos etc designed to best match the selected Style For details on Repertoire see page 56 To return to the previous display press the EXIT button e You can instantly jump back to the Main display by double clicking on one of the A J buttons 3 Press the ACMP button to turn on Auto Accompaniment Use the left hand section lower part of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment ACMP START ENDING rit B5 mmm gt gs 3 5 6 4 A Press the SYNC START button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing 5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the Auto Accompaniment starts Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand BOG Chord Fingerings There are seven different fingering methods you can use to specify chords page 106 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual AT 48 6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing any of the ENDING rit but tons at the point in the score page 46 indicated by Ending When Ending playback is finished the Style automatically stops DMIA About the various Styles Refer to the Style List in the Data
228. ew Vocal Harmony types PSR S900 iiie tree penne tte rd eret ete tha eo soaussedenepsabenscndssdadedauecnsetsbecdasase page 184 s Creating TIew EfTect LY ES terno Dee tere tero Le Eoo EE Ea AEEA e re ep rea eds page 95 ES elcenmercdiOE rU CT PV page 97 Controlling and adjusting the pitch e Adjusting the overall pitch of the PSR S900 S700 sssssseeen Master T ne ien tete page 87 Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard sss Scale T tie eerte page 87 s Adjusting tlie octave of the keyboard rte reete tr titer enia eerie etna aho bx y speso desee bao pegas page 93 e Transposing notes Master Transpose Keyboard Transpose Song Transpose sssesseseeee ee page 61 e Setting TRANSPOSE button to independently control separate parts ssesssseee e page 93 Using the PITCH BEND Wheel e page 33 s Using the MODULATION WHEE ssrin esineen eos eter toten poseer Hae deberet ga y kei ss rE TES R page 33 Singing with a connected microphone PSR S900 Connecting a microphone to the instr lment enint tet eren ea RE Re EP ae tone enero cases EERS pages 57 194 e Automatically applying vocal harmonies to your voice Vocal Harmony eene page 60 Singing while following along with the Lyrics on the display sesseeeee page 58 e Singing while following along with the Lyrics on a separate TV monitor
229. except for the cookies and bookmarks including those related to Internet connec tion Press the 5 V SETTING button to call up the Internet Settings dis play 2 Press the TAB 4 buttons to select the OTHERS tab 3 Press the 1A V A V button to select Initialize INTERNET SETTING BROWSER LAN MSN OTHERS Proxy server Proxy port Non proxy server Delete cookies Delete all bookmarks Initialize setup Connect information 4 Use the 2A W 3 A V EDIT buttons to initialize the Internet set tings Delete cookies bookmarks Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize oper ation above To delete the cookies or bookmarks use the appropriate operations in the OTHERS tab display page 180 Glossary of Internet Terms Glossary of Internet Terms Broadband An Internet connection technology service such as ADSL and optical fiber that allows for high speed high volume data communication Browser The software used to search for access and view web pages For this instrument this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Inter net The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer
230. f data Even when the switch is in the STANDBY position electric ity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level When not using the PSR S900 S700 for an extended period of time be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC out let PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Power Supply Make sure that the instrument s STANDBY ON switch is set to STANDBY off 2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the power adaptor gt 4 Connect the power adaptor s DC plug to the instrument s DC IN ter minal on the rear panel oc A NOUUOUOUOLDT OUD HOUOUUDUQUNUUE To electrical outlet Connect the other end normal AC plug to the nearest electrical out let Powering Up 2 NOTE Before you switch your PSR S900 S700 on or off first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment Press the STANDBY ON switch The main display appears in the display Oooo 000000 a Di D AI STANDBY ON 1058 goood When you re ready to turn off the power press the STANDBY ON switch again 2 Setting the volume Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level NS MIN MAX ea Air Vents N CAUTION This instrument has special air vents in the top panel see below and rear panel Do not place objects where they might block the air vent since this may prevent adequate ven tilation of
231. f data to be received The PSR S900 S700 can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels 16 channels x 2 ports by USB connection With the exception of the next two parts the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual e KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument s keyboard performance EXTRA PART 1 5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data Normally these parts are not used by the instrument itself The PSR S900 S700 can be used as a 32 channel multi timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the general parts except for the microphone sound Rx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel 1 16 flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel s 2 NOTE Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 137 Bl MIDI transmission reception via the USB ter minal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the MIDI terminals and the USB terminal which can be used for transmitting receiving 32 channels 16 channels x 2 ports of the MIDI messages is as follows MIDI transmission USB TO MIDI OUT jack HOST jack MIDI reception USB TO MIDI IN jack HOST jack MIDI USB1 MIDI USB 01 1 01 16 USB 01 16
232. g off the power PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 57 58 Singing with the Lyrics Display Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data select a Song page 36 2 Press the LYRICS TEXT button PSR S900 LYRICS button PSR S700 to display the lyrics When the Text display appears press the 1 W LYRICS button to display the lyrics PSR S900 3 Press the SONG gt 11 PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays 4 Press the SONG E STOP button to stop playback BET When the lyrics are unreadable You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to International or Japanese in the Song Setting display IFUNCTION B SONG SETTING if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data page 166 Changing the Lyrics Background Picture PSR S900 You can change the background picture of the Lyrics display Press the 7 A W 8 A Y BACKGROUND button in the Lyrics dis play to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture files and select the desired one Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display Changing the lyrics You can change the lyrics as desired page 170 Displaying Text PSR S900 This feature lets you show text files created on a compu
233. ga Voices style data you ve created on the What makes Mega Voices special is their use of velocity switching Nor PSR S900 S700 using the Mega mal Voices use velocity switching too to make the sound quality and Voices will not sound properly or level of a Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it This when played back on other makes the instrument s Voices sound authentic and natural However instruments with Mega Voices each velocity range the measure of your playing strength has a completely different sound For example a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various perfor mance techniques In conventional instruments different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect However now with Mega Voices a con vincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise veloci ties need to play the sounds they re not intended for playing from the keyboard They are however very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data especially when you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part cr Pa E ga e e io o ct iere ey El om m Q 2 eje lt S fe mn Live These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo to produce a truly authentic rich sound f
234. ge 151 To close the Part selection display press the EXIT button Press the D button to select the RIGHT2 Start recording The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording page 148 Press the SONG Bl STOP button to stop recording Co L SYNC START lt lt gt gt u o L NEW S When recording is finished a message appears prompting you to save the recorded performance appears To close the message press the EXIT but ton For instructions on saving Song data see step 8 Listen to your newly recorded performance Press the SONG P H PLAY PAUSE button to playback the performance you just recorded REC a o L L NEW SONG Y m s o START 2 lt lt gt gt co To record another channel repeat steps 2 through 6 Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song Selection display Recording Your Performance to MIDI for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display N caution page 73 About Song channels Default channel part assignments are shown below Channels Default Parts Channels Keyboard parts 1 RIGHT1 Zz 9 RHYTHM1 2 RIGHT1 Ss 10 RHYTHM2 3 RIGHT1 as 11 BASS E 4 RIGHT1 ge 12 CHORD1 5 M Padt m 13 CHORD2 E 6 M Pad2 Ques 14 PAD pi 7 M Pad3 32S 15 PHRASE1 8 M Pad4 liu 16 PHRASE2 About keyboard parts There are
235. he Quick Guide E Starting Stopping a Song Press the SONG M PLAY PAUSE button to start Song playback and press the SONG lf STOP button to stop In addition there are several other conve nient ways to start stop a Song Starting Playback Synchro Start You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard While playback is stopped simultaneously press the SONG ll STOP and gt E PLAY PAUSE buttons simultaneously To cancel the Synchro Start function simultaneously press the SONG ll STOP and gt H PLAY PAUSE buttons simultaneously once again Tap function This useful function lets you press the TAP TEMPO button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed Simply tap press release the button four times for a 4 4 time signature while the instrument is in Synchro Start standby mode and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped Fade In The FADE IN OUT button can be used to produce smooth fade ins when starting the Song playback To produce fade ins press the FADE IN OUT button while playback is stopped and then press the SONG 9 MM PLAY PAUSE button to start playback Stopping Playback Fade Out The FADE IN OUT button can be used to produce smooth fade outs when stop ping the Song playback Press the FADE IN OUT button at the beginning of the phrase you want to fade out Set the Fade In Out ti
236. he disks used that will eventu ally cause read and write errors To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially avail able dry type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail ability of proper headcleaning disks About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care and fol low these precautions Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight extremely high or low temperatures or excessive humidity dust or liq uids Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields such as those produced by televisions speakers motors etc since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk rendering it unreadable Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or hous ing Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location To Protect Your Data Write protect Tab To prevent accidental erasure of important data slide the disk s write protect tab to the protect position tab open When saving data make sure that the disk s write protect tab is set to the overwrite
237. he record BIA Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically When sorting records by Style name use the 4 A V l 5 A W button to skip up or down through the Styles alphabetically Simultaneously press the A W buttons to move the cursor to the first record BEAT This is the time signature registered to each record TEMPO This is the assigned tempo setting for the record PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 55 56 4 Play the keyboard Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected record DMA Tempo Lock Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record To turn on the Tempo Lock function press the I TEMPO LOCK button in the Music Finder display Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 137 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style Repertoire The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings voice number etc for the currently selected Style select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the PRESET USER tab on Style selection display BET The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the PRESET USER tab The Repertoire function cannot
238. he rele vant setting display SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings page 207 TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings page 207 RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings page 208 BASS display CHORD DETECT display Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI recep tion data page 209 Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data page 209 5 When you ve finished editing press the EXIT button to return to the MIDI template selection display PRESET or USER 6 Select the USER tab display to save the data by using the TAB lt gt buttons page 73 MIDI Settings PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 205 seoi eg 1900 YUM 1ueunujsu INO SUISA Other Devices Es S z aa c o E 2 5 n E i 8 gt eo c uu 2 206 MIDI Settings Pre Programmed MIDI Templates MIDI ma mm MIDI Accord mia KBD amp STYLE mia MIDI Accord2 ua Master KBD mias MIDI Pedall mias MIDI Pedal2 mar Song mar Glock Ext ptas MIDI OFF DELETE SAVE Template name Description All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts RIGHT 1 2 and LEFT with the exception of Song parts KBD amp STYLE Basically the same as All Parts with the exception of how keyboard parts are man aged The right hand parts are handled as UPPER instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left h
239. hods as shown below Quick Recording gt See below This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance useful for example in recording solo piano pieces You can record to the TR 1 R or TR 2 L but ton and also to the EXTRA TR STYLE track which can be used for recording at the same time Multi track Recording gt page 149 This lets you record a whole Song including several different instrument parts to create the sound of a full band or orchestra Record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions You can also record over already recorded parts of an existing Song Preset Song or a Song on USB storage device with your own performance Realtime Recording Step Recording gt page 152 This method lets you compose your performance by writing it down one event at a time This is a non realtime manual recording method similar to writing music notation onto paper You can input notes chords and other events one by one realtime performance is not needed Step Recording You can also edit Songs after they ve been recorded page 162 For example you can edit specific notes one by one or you can use the Punch In Out function to re record a specific part Quick Recording This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance Press the SONG REC and SONG Bl STOP buttons simulta
240. ial damages Therefore these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from state to state CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities 1 Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to the retailer selling the product an authorized service center or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date sales receipt credit card copy etc when requesting service and or parts under warranty Shipping and or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility Units shipped for service should be packed securely Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days IMPORTANT Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization A Return Authorization RA will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual an
241. ient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac tory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corpo ration of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA class B OBSERVERA Apparaten kopplas inte ur v xelstr msk llan n tet sa lange som den ar ansluten till v gguttaget ven om sj lva apparaten har st ngts av ADVARSEL Netspaeendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt s leeenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt som er t endt ogs selvom der or slukket p apparatets afbryder VAROITUS Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty k ytt kytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta standby This product contains a high intensity lamp that con tains a small amount of mercury Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal information in the United States refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site www eiae org This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF
242. ifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeat edly A B Repeat Select a Song page 36 2 Press the SONG gt H PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 3 Specify the repeat range Press the REPEAT button at the starting point A of the range to be repeated Press the REPEAT button again at the ending point B After an automatic lead in to help guide you into the phrase the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly BET Instantly returning to Point A Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped pressing the ll STOP button returns to Point A 4 Press the SONG BI STOP button to stop playback 5 Press the REPEAT button to turn off Repeat playback PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Other Methods for Specifying the A B Repeat Range 9 Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped Press the gt gt Fast Forward button to advance to the Point A location 2 Press the REPEAT button to specify Point A 3 Press the gt gt Fast Forward button to advance to the Point B location 4 Press the REPEAT button again to specify Point B 9 Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song Recording Your Performance Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature This is an effective practice tool allowing yo
243. igned to the same transmit channel If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the con nected MIDI device 2 NOTE About the protected Songs Write protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1 16 are set to be transmitted E MIDI messages which can be transmitted or received recognized The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANS MIT RECEIVE display Note Note events eeseeeeeeee page 168 CC CONTROL CHANGE sees page 168 e PC PROGRAM CHANCQGE mmm page 168 e PB Pitch Bend eee page 168 AT Aftertouch eee page 168 RECEIVE display MIDI Receive Settings LUD ee RECEIVE Bese aia CHANNEL MIDI USB 1 CH1 MIDI USB 1 CHS SONG MIDI USB 1 CHG SONG MIDI USB 1 CH7 SONG Rx HONITOR 2345678 MIDI UB10 0000000 USB2 o00000000 FIER CHRHHEL OUCH The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be called up in step 4 of the Basic Operation on page 204 This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received Operation Select the channel to be received and the part via which the selected channel will be received You can also determine the types o
244. ilable for all types with the exception of Multi Assign It determines the level of the harmony echo notes generated by the Harmony Echo effect SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo Tremolo or Trill is selected in Type above It determines the speed of the Echo Tremolo and Trill effects ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of Multi Assign This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the har mony echo notes will be sounded CHORD NOTE This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected ONLY When this is set to ON the Harmony effect is applied only to the note played in the right hand section of the keyboard that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of Multi Assign It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength letting you create harmony accents in the mel ody The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly above the set value Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts and Song Style channels including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds It lets you
245. ile 5 oce th rote rates Pee t eT 80 Data Backup oiii ennt eoi eoi nnes 81 Back p proCedul ciet cniin 81 Reference Using Creating and Editing Voices 83 Voice Characteristics eeeeeeee 83 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously 84 Keyboard Parts Right 1 Right 2 Left 84 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously Right 1 nd 2 Parts eere 85 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands Right 1 and Left Parts sssse 86 Changing Pitch niisiis 5 tentis rents 87 TANS POSEY cos E 87 Fine tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument 87 Scale TUNING eti t otto rt eren entra 87 Selecting the Harmony Echo type 89 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE eene 91 Basic PROGECUME ori eren inn tn aed eesriie 91 Voice Creating Voice Set suueess 99 Basic Procedure 5 cct tenter nens 99 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices 103 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 7 Using Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 106 Style Characteristics esses 106 Selecting a Chord Fingering Type 106 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a jd 107 Style Playback related Settings 109 Split Point Settings eene 110 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style MIXIN
246. ill be recorded when set to OFF or FIXED PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 109 Style Playback related Settings se Ais jueuirueduioo5y ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis Split Point Settings Style Change Behavior There are three types as shown below Section Set Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting differ ent Styles when Style playback is stopped When set to OFF and Style playback is stopped the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected When any of the MAIN A D sections is not included in the Style data the nearest section is automatically selected For example when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style MAIN C will be called up Tempo This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles dur ing Style playback HOLD ene The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained RESET iere The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style Part On Off This determines whether the Style Channel On Off status changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback HOLD eroe The Style Channel On Off status of the previous Style is maintained RESET een All Style Channels are set to On Split Point Settings These are the settings there are two Split Points that separate the different sec tions of the keyboard the Chord section the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1 a
247. in context listen to the demo songs for each Voice in the Voice Selection display page 31 step 3 press the 8 V DEMO button to start the Demo for the selected Voice 2 To stop the Demo press the 8 V DEMO button again Selecting percussion sounds When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the PERCUSSION amp DRUM KIT group is selected you can play various drums and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard Details are given in the Drum List provided in the Data List page 5 To check which Standard Kit 1 percussion sounds are assigned to each key look at the Drum Kit icons printed below the keys page 15 Selecting sound effects You can play individual sound effects such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard The sound effects are categorized as GM amp XG GMQ2 Press the PART SELECT RIGHT 1 button to call up the Voice selection display Press the 8 A UP button to call up the Voice categories Press the 2 A button to display page 2 Press the E F button to select GM amp XG GM2 Press the 2 A button to display page 2 Press the F button to select SoundEffect Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired sound effect Play the keyboard Selecting GM XG GM2 Voices BEX For details on the Voice allocation format see page 204 You can select the GM XG GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation Perform steps 1 4 described in the Selecting sound eff
248. in response to chord changes ROOT TRANS When the root note is transposed the Root Transpose pitch relationship between notes is maintained For example the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of C become 3 F3 A3 and C4 when they are trans When playinga When playing an F d i C major chord major chord posed to F Use this setting for chan nels that contain melody lines ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possibleto the previous note range For example g g8 the notes C3 E3 and G3 in the key of MC CE wa C become C3 F3 and A3 when they major ndk F majer Sho are transposed to F Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 129 un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu Style Creator B NTT Note Transposition Table This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED the transposition table used does not do any note conversion When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS the table used only converts the root note MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2 CHORD Suitable for chord transposition Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels especially when they contain piano or guitar like chordal p
249. in the LEFT tar Because of this if the Chord voice section of the keyboard generated by turning LEFT on when turning Match setting is set to off the the ACMP off Multi Pads may not sound appro priately 2 Press the D button then enter a name for each Multi Pad by mel page 134 3 Press the I button then save the Multi Pad data as a Bank contain ing a set of four Pads to the USER drive or USB storage device page 70 sped n nw eur Multi Pad Step Recording EDIT Step Recording can be executed in the EDIT page After selecting a Multi Pad in step 5 of the Multi Pad Realtime Recording on page 132 press the TAB lt 4 gt buttons to select the EDIT tab The EDIT page indicates the Event list that lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording pages 152 161 with the excep tion of the points listed below There is no menu for switching channels since Multi Pads contain data for only a single channel e In the Multi Pad Creator only the channel events can be entered and the System Exclusive messages can be edited Chord and Lyrics events are not available You can switch between the two types of Event Lists by pressing the F button PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 133 Multi Pad Editing Multi Pad Creator Multi Pad Editing Multi Pad Creator Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL SELECT button to call up the
250. ion begins to be applied RATIO This adjusts the compression ratio e OUT This adjusts the final output level E VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled e VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect in Vocoder mode page 190 is controlled by note data the notes you play on the keyboard and or the notes of the song data This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony SONG CHANNEL MUTE PLAY When set to MUTE the channel selected below to control Harmony is muted turned off during song playback OFF Channels 1 16 When set to OFF song data control over harmony is turned off When set to one of the values 1 16 note data played from a song on the PSR S900 or an external MIDI sequencer contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the harmony This setting is linked to the HARMONY CH setting in the SONG SETTING display page 145 KEYBOARD OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the har mony LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony BAL This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal your own voice and Vocal Harmony Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal When this is set to L lt H63 L Lead Vocal H Vocal Harmony only the Vocal Harmony is outp
251. ious types of controller data The instrument can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode select MIDI channels voices and effects change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts l gt NOTE MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data e The amount of data is much less e The data can be effectively and easily edited even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data MIDI messages can be divided into two groups Chan nel messages and System messages Channel Messages The PSR S900 S700 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 MIDI channels or reception of 32 channels for MIDI data reception when using the USB termi nal This is usually expressed as it can play 16 instru ments at the same time Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON OFF Program Change for each of the 16 channels PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Message Name Operation Panel Setting Note ON OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played Each mes sage includes a specific note num ber which corresponds to the key which is pressed plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played Program Change For selecting Voices with control change bank select MSB LSB set tings Control Change Volume panpot Mixing Console MODULATION Wheel operation etc Pitch Bend
252. ip3 pue Bunea Suis un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu 120 Style Creator Specifying sections from the panel buttons You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons INTRO IMAIN END ING etc on the panel Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display Change the sections by using the 6 A V I 7 A V buttons and execute the selection by pressing the B A button The INTRO 4 ENDING 4 sec tions cannot be specified with the panel controls Muting specific channels dur ing recording Turn off the desired channels by pressing the 1 V 8 W buttons Recordable Voices e RHY1 channel Any except Organ Flute and S Articulation Voices are record able RHY2 channel Only drum SFX kits are record able BASS PHR2 channels Any except Organ Flute Voices Drum SFX kits and S Articulation Voices are recordable Preset Organ Flute Voices can be selected only on the LCD display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 6 Use the 3 A V 4 A V buttons to select the section page 118 to be recorded STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat ASSEMBLY GROOVE CHANNEL PARAMETER EDIT BAR 1 C 7 A OB F LJ B G _ HEH G STYLE H SECTION HAIN B HAIN C
253. is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office and allow them to all access the Internet and share data A router is usually con nected between a modem and a computer although some modems have a built in router Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network providing access to files and services Site Short for website this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together For example the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with http www yamaha com is referred to as the Yamaha site SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection Communi cation is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large scale network into several smaller networks URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet A complete URL usually starts with the characters http Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless cable free connection Wireless Game Adaptor Wireless Ethernet Con verter or Bridge Device that allows easy wire
254. isk drive or floppy disks Removing a Floppy Disk e After checking that the instrument is not accessing the floppy disk checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in When the floppy disk is ejected pull it out of the drive If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck do not try to force it but instead try pressing the eject button again or try re inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again Access of the disk indicates an active operation such as recording playback or deletion of data If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on the disk is automatically accessed since the instrument checks whether the disk has data 22 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors Cleaning the Disk Drive Read Write Head Clean the read write head regularly This instrument employs a precision magnetic read write head which after an extended period of use will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from t
255. it your songs too PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 12 USB Audio Recorder MUSIC FINDER VOICE PSR S900 Call up the perfect Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices Record entire accompaniment style page 30 83 performances as audio page 55 111 The PSR S900 S700 features a wealth of 8 data page 63 If you know what song you want to exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices 2 Connect a guitar or play but you don t know which style including piano strings woodwinds and more S microphone and record or voice would be right for it let the The instrument also has Mega Voices PSR 5 your playing and singing Music Finder help you Just select the 5900 5700 and Super Articulation voices together with the sounds of song title and the instrument PSR S900 Mega Voices feature different the instrument all mixed automatically calls up the most performance sounds of the same instrument dowi te a stereo audio appropriate style and voice in different velocity ranges designed recording and Connect directly to the Internet specifically for recorded MIDI data Super conveniently saved to a page 171 and get related information Articulation voices are similar to Mega USB storage device on records or download and add your Voices but with greater playability and favorite records to the instrument expressive realtime control __ Organ Flutes Craft your own organ voices page 103 This special function n
256. ite protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name cannot be moved to an external media such as a SmartMedia card or floppy disk A Song to which write protect has been applied cannot be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia floppy disk etc Use the USB TO DEVICE terminal to move the song to a USB flash memory device connected to this instrument The melody still plays back even when specifying Track 1 as the part to be muted for one handed prac tice A part other than the melody part has been assigned to Track 1 Reassign the channel containing the melody to Track 1 page 145 When displaying the music score long notes that have been entered such as whole notes and ties are not displayed correctly Long notes such as whole notes and ties may not be shown in the music score display exactly as they were entered Selecting Tenuto by pressing the H button before inputting each note in the Step Record display page 153 may solve the problem The tempo beat measure and music notation is not displayed correctly Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special free tempo settings For such Song data the tempo beat measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly The note name partially obscures the note in the dis play When several notes occur close to each other the note name may obscure the note at left The music
257. ive SettingS eeeeesseeeeeeeeessesneeeeees 208 Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI RECEIVE c 209 Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI RECEIVE E 209 8 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Appendix Troubleshooting eese 210 Specifications saesson 215 NAEK d 217 Panel Button Chart eese 220 Introduction Quick Guide Basic Operation Reference Using Creating and Editing Voices Using Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles The Multi Pads Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Using Creating and Editing Songs Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet Using a Microphone PSR S900 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Appendix PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 9 Application Index Starting up before turning the power on Setting up the Musie feste page 18 C nnecting headphones e page 18 s Tu triing the POWER ON OM aeta cerei eee im eet EE E V E E A E page 17 Listening to the PSR S900 S700 Playing the DEMOS M T bese page 24 PAVING SONGS suc coves vues d page 36 saurud uu cives c
258. k that connects a group of computers at a single location such as an office or home by means of a special cable Link Location information in other sentences and images etc that are under buttons and character strings on a web page When the place with the link is clicked the page selection jumps to the relevant link Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer It con verts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line and vice versa NTP Short for Network Time Protocol a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network For this instrument the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time date for cookies and SSL Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services In order to connect to the Internet it is necessary to contract to a provider Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing informa tion on the Internet It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself If not it forwards the request to the real server Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed and to filter requests usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks For example a router
259. key Keyboard Parts 1 rre re ehem 84 KEYBOARD PANEEL 2 cire nete tbe eren 33 61 KIRNBERGER L LAN Language LCD Eeft Locum RO REO rite Left Hold LIVE auus Lyrics M Main Display ro iuro tonat tro eere Drs MASTER TUNE cin iot etuer ut oap ren aaan e zoe es yea due MASTER VOLUME dial MEAN TONE MEDIAS iiie tices Mega VOICE civ cyst Sevidas ozguns rete re uot e eene MELODIC MINOR Messages Metronome MIC SETTING iesoete epe pue aono tube ane esempio pet bronce Microphone MIDI MIDI recording MIDI Settings siete te iter te rmt MIDI Templates terere tne eerie MIXING CONSOLE Modulation Wheel MULTI FINGER Multi Pad Creator x5 oret rt etes bees Multi Pads be bre im ot OT Multi track recording Music Finder MIU ij N NAME INGEAUIOMN 1 cese acres errato base nde eres E e ex pe Ente pe E e ux roa Ra 39 O One Touch Setting One Handed Practice seeee e 40 Orga Flut s eraot deterrere etas 83 103 Others Internet Settings see 180 OTS Wifi oriire te eee te teer eaten te ote et ee aR deuda OTS Link Timing OVERALL SETTING us cente vseso de eorr voa e tute rents 188 Owner Name P PANEL PART PARAMETER Part PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Pause Pedal polarity i rete nes percussion sounds performance assistant technology sss 44 Phrase Mark c4sis lt s3cesseasdoa
260. l Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Voice name RIGHT 1 indicated at the right edge of the display Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part page 84 RIGHT 2 indicated at the right edge of the display Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part page 84 LEFT indicated at the right edge of the display Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part page 84 When the Left Hold function is ON an H indication appears page 50 Pressing one of the F G and H buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part page 31 Multi Pad Bank name Indicates the names of the selected Multi Pad Banks page 132 Pressing the I button calls up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display page 133 Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name Pressing the J button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display page 136 When the Freeze function is ON an F indication appears page 138 Volume Balance Displays the volume balance among the parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the 1 A W 8 A W buttons uoleiado aiseg File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below From here you can select Voices Styles and other data VOICE category VOICE selection buttons o J Piano GUITAR am
261. l sound excepting the microphone input allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound DSP MIC ON OFF This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF DSP MIC TYPE This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the micro phone sound DSP MIC DEPTH This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound Using Your Instrument with Other Devices P 200 P 199 P198 P198 P194 P194 o OO O o 9 ad To pevice to Host kid 5 Peu ViDEO our 59 e S R L L R R DC IN 46V 2 OUTPUT QQQ0D000000000000000000000000000000000000 ee When these are connected you can use the instrument s MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device Connect the instru N CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power of all the components Also before turning any components on or off make sure ment s OUTPUT L L R R jacks standard phone to set all volume levels to minimum 0 Otherwise elec jacks and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers trical shock or damage to the components may occur using appropriate audio cables Use only the L L R jack for connection with a monaural device Instrument Powered speakers Connecting Audio amp Video Devices
262. lder Press the 7 V FOLDER button to call up the naming display for a new folder CASE MHOG 81 ABG2 DEF3 GHI4 JKLS Input the name of the new folder see below Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files folders and when inputting the Keyword for Music Finder function website The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to a conventional mobile phone Entering characters should be done in the display shown below scarouon fee e 81 ABC2 DEF3 amp HI4 JKL5 MNOG Change the type of character by pressing the 1 A button f you select a language other than Japanese as the Language page 66 the following different types of characters are available CASE nceki Alphabet capital letters half size numbers half size marks half size CASE eeseseeeeeeee Alphabet lowercase letters half size numbers half size marks half size e If you select Japanese as the Language page 66 the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered bi kana kan Hiragana and Kanji marks full size p kana Katakana normal size marks full size pt kana Katakana half size marks half size AB ioannis Alphabet capital and small letters full size num bers full size marks full size ABG ees Alphabet capital and small letters half size num
263. less connection with digital consumer electronic devices printers and game machines etc equipped with LAN ports PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 183 jeujodu Y O j eutQ 00Z5 006S 3Sd eui Sun2euuo Using a Microphone PSR S900 Reference to Quick Guide pages Singing Along with Song Playback Karaoke On Your Own Performance eese page 57 GonnectingialMicroplione TREES page 57 Singing with the Lyrics Display eere page 58 Convenient Functions for Karaoke eeeeeeeeeeeres page 59 Adjusting the terpor a com urease eie E page 34 namsposes ee USE DU UU DNE page 59 ANDO Vie eiecti CO VOU VOl Cen ten eco I page 59 Radin rrannenmy ocas TtONOUPVOlcG e page 60 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch Vocal CueTIME page 145 Convenient Functions for Singing Along witbiYouriOwniPerfonmance e page 61 Ghaneine tine Key dnensMOse M s uM MM E page 61 Displaying the Music Score on Instrument and Lyrics on TV page 62 Making Announcements Between Songs sees page 62 Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice Karao Key page 146 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters This section explains briefly how to create your own Vocal Harmony page 60 types and lists the detailed parameters for editing Up to ten Vocal Harmony types can be created and saved Press the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK 0FF_ 1 MIC EFFECT OFF F VOCAL
264. ll play back from the next repetition letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels For all other channels except rhythm delete the original data before recording When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles CHD2 PAD PHR1 PHR2 Overdub recording not possible Delete the data before recording Overdub recording possible 1 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording editing page 46 When creating a new Style from scratch press the C NEW STYLE button from the display shown in step 5 below Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU Press the B button to call up the Style Creator display Use the TAB lt gt buttons then select the BASIC tab to call up the RECORD display On KRW N Call up the display for selecting sections etc by pressing the EXIT button Style Creator When recording channels BASS PHR2 based on an internal Style delete the original data before recording Overdub recording is not possible on channels BASS PHR2 When the RECORD display chan nel indication at the lower part of the STYLE CREATOR display dis appears you can press the F REC CH button to re display it PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 119 se Ais jueuiueduioooy ony y Sun
265. mber of the connected devices PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual File Folder Operations in the File Selection Display Edge m page 73 e Copying Files Folders Copy amp Paste page 74 Moving Files Cut amp Paste seite ee ect era eri Re Ee E page 75 Deleting Files Foldets xiv sas re En e ERR tesi boe eei bg sr eS EERG sees page 75 Renamithp Files FO d6 s uu ceti tete b eee RE RERR ERE page 76 e Selecting Custom Icons for Files shown at the left of file name page 76 Cheating a New Folder cree edite reete rii eet eias page 77 Entering characters siete IERI ba ed 02 YER UI ERR RTT URP PE ORO RAE page 77 Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted a message may appear prompting you to format the device media If so execute the format operation N CAUTION The format operation deletes any previously existing data Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data Proceed with caution especially when connecting multiple USB storage medias 1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the USB TO DEVICE 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt MEDIA 3 Press the A B buttons to select the USB device to be formatted from the device list 4 Press the H button to format the device media UTILITY Pie eee MEDIA E53 EXE3ISU E 3331 DEVICE LIST 3 arm es g
266. me The times of the fade in and fade out can be set independently For details refer to page 108 Operations for Song Playback Depending on the particular Song data the Style will also play back at the same time PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 141 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr Operations for Song Playback E Top Pause Rewind Fast Forward Moving to the top position of the Song Press the SONG Bl STOP button regardless of whether the Song is stopped or playing back Pausing the Song Press the SONG 9 M PLAY PAUSE button during Song playback Press the SONG gt M PLAY PAUSE button again and the Song will resume from the current position Moving back and forth rewind and fast forward Press the SONG 44 REW or SONG gt gt FF button to move back and forth rewind and fast forward It calls up a pop up window showing the current measure number in the Main display For Songs containing Phrase Marks you can use the lt P gt REW FF Phrase Mark buttons to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song If you don t want Phrase Mark is a pre pro to set the Song position by the phrase marks press the E button and select grammed marker in certain Song BAR in the window showing the Song position data which specifies a certain location set of measures in the For Songs not containing Song Phrase Marks SONG POSITION 4 gt gt ma ND For Songs containing Phrase Mark
267. n EN NEES L OFF J OFF J OFF Be GI ENG zr 3 Press the 6 A V 7 A V buttons to turn the harmony vocals Vocal Harmony on A Press the H button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display 5 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type For details on the Vocal Harmony types refer to the Data List available at the Yamaha website See page 5 VOCAL HARMONY TYPE CountryQuar amp 5 Std Duet s silcisaMenduar ommem 1X amp MixAcapQuar amp 5 ClosedChoir n amp 5 WomenChoir amp Girl Duet amp JazzSisters amp 3 SpdyMouse di UUUUU p2 P3 Pa PS Pe P 6 Press the ACMP button to turn on Auto Accompaniment 7 Press the SONG gt 1 PLAY PAUSE button and sing into the microphone The harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Adjusting the microphone and Song volume PSR S900 You can adjust the volume balance between the Song playback and the microphone Press the BALANCE button to call up the Volume Balance display To adjust the microphone volume press the 4 A W button To adjust the Song volume press the 1 A W button Press the EXIT button to close the volume balance display Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance Changing the Key Tra
268. n at the upper left of the Song name In case of a Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name the file icon may have been changed Songs to which write protect has been applied cannot be played back when the file icon of the original has been changed MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL Make sure this is set to INTERNAL page 207 Song playback stops before the Song is finished The Guide function is turned on In this case playback is waiting for the correct key to be played Press the GUIDE button to turn off the guide function The Song last selected before turning off the power is no longer available e If the Song last selected before turning off the power is contained in a USB storage device you ll need to recon nect the same USB storage device to call up the Song again The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display shown by pressing the lt 4 lt gt gt REW FF buttons This happens when playing back music data for which a specific fixed tempo is set In the AB Repeat function the B point cannot be set The A point has not been set Set the B point only after setting the A point When playing back a Song some channels do not play e Playback of these channels may be set to OFF Turn playback on for those channels that are set to OFF page 146 A Song to which wr
269. n display while a Song is playing back The NEXT indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name To cancel this setting press the 8 W Cancel button E Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the Song Playback When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time channels 9 16 in the Song data are replaced with style channels allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below Select a Song page 36 Select a Style page 46 3 Press the STYLE CONTROL ACMP button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL SYNC START button to enable standby letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing 5 Press the SONG gt Il PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 6 Play chords along with the Song The chord name is indicated in the Main display To return to the Main dis play press the DIRECT ACCESS button then press the EXIT button When the Song playback is stopped the Style playback is also stopped at the same time Tempo for playing back a Song and a Style at the same time When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used Playing Songs with the Quick Start function With the default settings the Quick Start function is turned on On some commercially a
270. nd key range press the PART SELECT LEFT button The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice drum kit etc of the Style or Song from the Mixer When changing the rhythm percussion Voices drum kits etc of the Style and Song from the VOICE parame ter the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound In the case of Song playback you can restore the original sound by returning to the begin ning of the Song and playing back from that point In the case of Style play you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again Tremolo Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute Voice This is normal Tremolo and Trill settings in the Har mony Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices The Harmony function does not operate Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or Al Full Keyboard fingering modes Select an appropriate fingering mode page 107 When a Voice is changed the previously selected effect is changed Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on page 105 The Voice produces excessive noise Certain Voices may produce noise depending on the Harmonic Content and or Brightness settings in the FIL TER page of the Mixing Console display page 93 The sound is distort
271. nd 2 section The two Split Point settings below are specified as note names Call up the operation display FUNCTION C STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING gt TAB lt 4 gt SPLIT POINT STYLE SETTING SPLIT POINT CHORD FINGERING 2208 SEGUE SPLIT POINT Bae Hold down one of the risht buttons and use the DATA ENTRY dial SEL STYLE RIGHTi G un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu UU B B 2 Use the F H buttons to set the Split Point e Split Point S separates the Chord section for Style playback from the section s for playing Voices RIGHT 1 2 and LEFT e Split Point L separates the two sections for playing Voices LEFT and RIGHT 1 2 These two settings can be set to the same note as in the default or two different notes as desired 110 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style MIXING CONSOLE Setting the Split Point S and the Split Point L to the same note Split Point S L Y Voice RIGHT 1and 2 e o mmm L Chord section _ Voice LEFT Press the F S L button and rotate the DATA ENTRY dial Split Point s Split Point D Setting the Split Point S and the Split Point L to different notes Y Y i B Chordsection L Voice LEFT
272. nd edit the Song SONG CREATOR NewSong C CHANNEL CHORD 1 16 _SYS EX NORMAL REPLACE ALL When recordins Overwrite recordins stops the rest of G starts when the sona JF the previously recorded starts data on the channel C vill be lost H gt ER Ud UU Re Recording a Specific Section Punch In Out REC MODE eee page 163 This lets you re record a specific section of a Song e Editing Channel Events CHANNEL eee page 164 This lets you edit the channel events For example you can delete data or transpose notes by channel a o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG o 9 ob c TD Editing Note or Chord Events CHORD 1 16 page 167 This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords Editing System Event SYS EX seen page 169 This lets you change the tempo or the time signature Editing Lyrics LYRICS s i 0 lt cesccceccesestecsnesecdesvsccdeseesesecesessessaes page 170 This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events 162 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI Re Recording a Specific Section Punch In Out REC MODE When re recording a specific section of an already recorded Song use the Punch IN OUT function In this method only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch
273. ng playback Karaoke or Your Own Performance eese IPIE page 57 Connectilig a Microphone PSR S900 c t eS page 57 Singing withthiebyries Display eter cette page 58 Displaying lextiPSReSOOO iiss erase E A T page 58 Convenient UNCIONs TOF Kata Ker t EL page 59 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Win PEM On it ai CO esas e ecce mE A EL EE page 61 Recording Your Performance as Audio USB Audio Recorder PSR S900 scccescccsssccessccssscesecceenes page 63 Compatible Song Types The PSR S900 S700 can play back the following Song types Preset Songs Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display Your Own Recorded Songs These are Songs which you ve recorded page 43 page 147 and saved to the USER USB display USB is available when you connect a USB storage device such as a USB flash memory floppy disk drive to the instrument Commercially Available Song Data A variety of song data for the instrument can be downloaded from the Yamaha website and even more titles are available commercially as Disk Songs Disk Songs are available when you connect the optional floppy disk drive to the instru ment The instrument is compatible with the Song disks floppy disks that bear the following marks GENERAL GENERAL a mia iig Ke ses 3 140 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Operations for Song Playback This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback which are not covered in t
274. ng the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet always hold fall over the plug itself and not the cord e Before moving the instrument remove all connected adaptor and other cables e Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument or during e When setting up the product make sure that the AC outlet you are using is electrical storms easily accessible If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet Even when the power switch is turned off electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum evel When you are not using the product for a long time make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet Use only the stand specified for the instrument When attaching the stand use the provided screws only Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal e Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple connector Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause overheating in the Outlet e Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or components or result in the instrument falling over heat Such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to e Do not place objects in front of the instrument s air vent since this may prevent prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal adequate ventilation of the internal com
275. nn Press the 8 A OK button to save the file If you want to cancel the Save operation press the 8 W CANCEL button The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order Internal memory User tab displays capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 1 4MB PSR S900 560KB PSR S700 This capacity applies to all file types including Voice Style Song and Registration data files PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 73 uoleiado aiseg Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Restrictions for protected Songs Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the file names The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below Prot 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display Disk Orchestra Collection DOC Songs and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs These cannot be copied moved saved to USB storage device Prot 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha protection formatted Songs These cannot be copied These can be moved saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device Prot 2 Edit Indicates edited Prot 2 Orig Songs Make sure to save these to the same folder containing the corresponding Prot 2 Orig Song These cannot be copied These can be moved saved only to the USER tab display
276. nnected by MIDI LOCAL CONTROL page 207 For example several parts or channels can be transmit ted simultaneously including the Style data as shown on the next page Example Recording a performance with the auto accompa niment Style playback sound of the instrument to an exter nal sequencer PSR S900 S700 track MIDI cable channel RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument 9 External sequencer Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Channe Channel Channel Channe Channe Channel Channel Channel Channe Channe Channel As you can see it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data page 207 The instrument also allows you to determine how the received data is played back page 208 System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system These include System Exclusive messages for transferring data unique to each instrument manufac turer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI device Message Name Operation Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effecttype settings Mixing Console etc Realtime Messages Clock setting Start stop operation The messages transmitted
277. ns for Step Recording Press the SONG REC and SONG Bl STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song New Song is called up for recording REC m H 44 gt gt En PD O Ms L SYNC START 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU 3 Press the A button to call up the Song Creator display for recording editing a Song DIGITAL RE amp STYLE CREATOR E A Ji SONG CREATOR c tiv MULTI PAD CREATOR 4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB lt gt buttons For recording melodies Select the 1 16 tab For recording chords Select the CHORD tab Bb a TAB gt io ee 88A op 1 16 E drd 1326PPa E n LEER Hogon End z TE m 5 ag p B gu Ed C36 E c END 4 E S p c o 2 e ol r 45 BAR BERT GLK 901 1 0000 pataentey ML ESA FSA raa r VIAE ELE 5 If you select the 1 16 tab in step 4 press the F button to select the channel for recording On Press the G button to call up the STEP RECORD display 7 Start Step Recording For recording melodies See page 153 For recording chords See page 160 152 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance to MIDI Recording Melodies This section explains how to step record notes using three mu
278. nspose See below PSR S900 S700 Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics on TV gt page 62 Making Announcements Between Songs gt page 62 ee Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice Karao Key gt page 146 PSR S900 S700 Changing the Key Transpose You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key For example the Song data is in F but you feel most comfortable singing in D and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C To match up the keys set the Master Transpose to 0 the Keyboard Transpose to 2 and the Song Transpose to 3 This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key 1 can up the operation display FUNCTION D CONTROLLER TAB lt 4 gt KEYBOARD PANEL B TRANSPOSE ASSIGN 2 Press the 4A V 5 A V button to select the desired transpose type The following types are available Select the one most suited to your purpose KEYBOARD Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback controlled by what you play in the chord section of the keyboard SONG Transposes the pitch of Song playback MASTER Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument i 3 Press the TRANSPOSE button to transpose You can set the value in semitone steps To reset the transpose value press the buttons simultaneously A Press the EXIT button to close the TRANSPO
279. nstrument based on the Song data As a result it may not be exactly the same as com mercially available sheet music of the same song especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes For information on creating Song data see page 147 7CDeHHHHu K E2 6AOEBsss ss S RRw GT BEPEeE g GE c select a Song page 36 4 2 Press the SCORE button to display the music notation Bid Look through the entire score before playing back the Song Press the TAB 44 gt buttons to select subsequent pages You can also use the footswitch to select subsequent pages page 196 3 Press the SONG gt 11 PLAY PAUSE button to start playback The ball bounces along through the score indicating the current position A Press the SONG 9m STOP button to stop playback Changing the Notation Display You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences Press the SCORE button to display the music nota tion BEG The music notation at right is for instructional purposes only and the song depicted is not one of the preset Songs on your instrument 2 Change the following settings as desired Changing the size of the music notation Press the 7 A W button to change the size of the music LEFT T RIGH
280. nues when Vocal CueTIME the correct note is played aa SINGLE ALL RANDON On 133 AUTO TRAGK2 TRACK1 CH SET c RUE OFF OFF 1 Pit On TRIEBARTIUNAL arms 2 OFF i Returning to the Main display Here s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other dis play Simply press the DIRECT ACCESS button then the EXIT button PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 67 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display There are two basic display types Main and Selection Here are explanations of each display segment and its basic operation Main Display The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the cur rently selected Voice and Style allowing you to see them at a single glance The Main display is the one A usually see when you play the keyboard Returning to the Main display Here s a convenient way to 2345678 4 Strings Cool Fri GalaxyEP S return to the Main display from peren octavevo Suit pormr s Fe2 L Fe T any other display Simply press s c A RR d om jl 9 the DIRECT ACCESS button E GrandPiano O then the EXIT button Live o D ea 4 120 STYLE MULTI PAD O xxi StraightsPop amp amp E GtriGBtCuti ONG STYLE M PAD MIC LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 Q Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name time signature and tempo
281. o B e C C C Initialize MEDIA All data will be deleted E y When the media is inserted to the ONG AUTO OPEN device selected in the device list On the first song in the media will be 138999 selected automatically Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display Saving Files This operation lets you save your original data such as Songs and Voices you ve created to a file After you ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR or VOICE SET display press the SAVE display button The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears Keep in mind that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display REC START REC EMD NORMAL REPLACE ALL When recordings Overwrite recording stops the rest of starts when the sons J the previously recorded starts data on the channel will be lost T SAVE l PEDAL REC END REPLACE ALL PUNCH INZOUT PUNCH OUT ON L OFF PUNCH OUT RT 002 lt gt E gt E gt E gt 4 2 Select the appropriate tab USER USB etc to which you want to save the data by using the TAB lt gt buttons 3 Press the 6 V SAVE button to call up the file naming display ZEN m 81 ABC2 DEF3 amp HI4 JKLS HNO6 a Enter the file name page 77
282. old the pedal all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain Releasing the pedal immedi ately stops damps any sustained notes SOSTENUTO Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note s the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held However all subsequent notes will not sustain This makes it possible to sustain a chord for example while other notes are played staccato SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect Pressing this pedal reduces the vol ume and changes the timbre of the notes you play This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released PORTAMENTO The portamento effect a smooth slide between notes can be produced while the pedal is pressed Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style i e a note is played while the preceding note is still held Portamento Time can also be adjusted from the Mixing Console page 93 PITCH BEND Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal MODULATION S ARTICULATION PSR S900 Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard Moreover various effects can be added to the S Articulation Voice PSR S900 page 83 The effect becomes deeper when pressing down the f
283. olume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss u experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician ects on the instrument since this might d do not e Don high If yo Saving and backing up your data e The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument Save the data to the USER tab display page 27 or USB storage device USB flash memory floppy disk etc Recorded Edited Songs page 43 147 162 Created Edited Styles page 118 Edited Voices page 99 Memorized One Touch Settings page 51 Edited MIDI settings page 204 Moreover the above mentioned data can be saved all at once Refer to page 81 Data in the USER tab display page 27 may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation Save important data to a USB storage device USB flash memory floppy disk etc When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page System Setup data listed in the Parameter Chart of the Data List downloadable from the web is automatically stored However this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display Refer to page 5 for how to obtain the Data List Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use E
284. on beforehand Restoring the Music Finder Data You can restore the instrument s Music Finder to its original fac tory settings page 79 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER USB To call up the Music Finder records you ve saved to USER USB follow the instructions below 1 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display MUSIC FINDER TAB lt 4 gt ALL 2 Pressthe 7 A V FILES button to open the File selection display of the Music Finder Use the TAB lt gt buttons to select USER USB 4 Press the A J buttons to select the desired Music Finder file When the file is selected a message is displayed according to the content of the file Press the desired button e REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file APPEND The records called up are added to the records currently in the instrument Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder file Select CANCEL to abort this operation Co MUSIC FINDER RLL STYLE BEAT 2 Nights In A Big City AUsBisBand 4 4 90 SORT BY A 40th Symphony PopClassics 474 F 50 Second Waltz VienneseWaltz 374 B 69 Summers Long PowerRock ASCENDING L LEKU 7 e C m A Bridge To Cross Troub C _ ABright amp Guiding Light FAVORITE gt A Cosy Life In Italy OrganB
285. ongz STEP RECORD n n02 2 1300 End L oun l Press the H button to select Tenuto I Press the I button to select normal note type Press the 5 A V button to select the half note length Om BR W NY While holding F3 on the keyboard press the 7 A V button Before you go on to step 6 release the F3 key and the 7 A W button aes 11 B 7 m Bp CO oO 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Recording Your Performance to MIDI After releasing the F3 key press the H button to select Staccato Press the 7 A W button to select the eighth note length Play the keys E3 F3 and A3 in order according to the notation exam mami nam a m Press the G button to select uu Press the H button to select Tenuto Press the I button to select dotted Press the 5 A V button to select the dotted half note length Play the A3 key on the keyboard as specified in the example Press the I button to select normal note type Press the 6 A W button to select the quarter note length Play the F3 key on the keyboard as specified in the example Press the SONG Bl STOP button to move the cursor to the begin ning of the Song LI H 44 gt gt m H 44 gt gt 9 559
286. oot controller You can turn this function on off for each key board part on this display When you use a S Articulation voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal footswitch you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal footswitch You can turn this function on off for each keyboard part on this display DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off HARMONY ECHO Switches the HARMONY ECHO Voice Effect on and off VOCAL HARMONY PSR S900 Switches the Vocal Harmony function on and off TALK PSR S900 Switches the MIC SETTING Talk function on and off SCORE PAGE While the song is stopped you can turn to the next score page SCORE PAGE While the song is stopped you can turn to the previous score page LYRICS PAGE While the song is stopped you can turn to the next lyrics page LYRICS PAGE While the song is stopped you can return to the last lyrics page TEXT PAGE PSR S900 You can turn to the next text page TEXT PAGE PSR S900 You can return to the last text page SONG PLAY PAUSE Same as the SONG gt Hl PLAY PAUSE button STYLE START STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button TAP TEMPO Same as the TAP TEMPO button SYNCHRO START Same as the SYNC START button SYNCHRO STOP Same as the SYNC STOP button INTRO1 3 Same as the INTRO I III buttons MAIN A D Same a
287. or the wah effect LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude or the tremolo effect SOUND FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower Filter can be used to produce elec tronic synthesizer like effects BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter see diagram Higher values result in a brighter sound Volume Cutoff frequency UN 01M 1 M 1 V i 1 1 1 i i Frequency pitch These frequencies are Cutoff range passed by the filter HARMONIC CONTENT Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency resonance set in BRIGHTNESS above see diagram Higher values result in a more pronounced effect Volume omen Resonance Frequency pitch EG The EG Envelope Generator settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds or the long release of a sustained piano tone ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played The lower the valu
288. osely to the microphone as possible Use a directional microphone Turn down the Master volume Style volume or Song volume control page 41 Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possible Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display page 188 Raise the microphone input level TH via the Com pressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING dis play page 189 Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Har mony mode page 190 USB Audio Recorder PSR S900 The message This drive is busy now appeared and then the recording was aborted Make sure to use a compatible USB storage device page 23 Make sure that the USB storage device has enough memory page 199 If you are using a USB memory device to which data has already been recorded check first that no important data remains on the device then format it page 72 and try recording again Specifications PSR S900 PSR S700 Sound Source AWM Stereo Sampling Keyboard 61 keys C1 C6 with Initial Touch Display 320 X 240 dots QVGA Color LCD 320 x 240 dots QVGA B W LCD Music Score Lyrics YES Text YES Polyphony max
289. ot only gives you a full set of rich and luscious organ sounds it also lets you create your own original organ voices just as on a traditional organ by increasing and decreasing the flute footages and adding percussive sounds IAHA pPsme S3 3CJC INTERNET ullum H li J ii H 1 J a ai l i I ui i Sis EUM USB TO DEVICE USB TO HOST terminal i rebate in 2s terminal Make music with a computer Access the special Yamaha Connect the instrument quickly and easily page 198 website and take advantage of to the USB storage device Dive in and take advantage of the the various music services page 199 wide world of computer music available there Connecting the USB storage software Connections and setup device such as USB flash are exceptionally easy and you memory and hard disk drive can play back your computer Multi Pads to this terminal lets you save recorded parts with different instrument sounds all from a single instrument Add spice to your performance with various types of data created special dynamic phrases page 52 132 on the instrument By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads you can play short rhythmic or melodic phrases You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the keyboard
290. ot to open the File Selection display Select YES to call up the File Selection display from which you can select the downloaded data To return to the Internet display select NO When the File Selection display is open press the 8 A UP button to call up the next highest level folder 174 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Operations in the Special Website Download Destination The download destination depends on the use of storage media as described below When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument during pur chase The downloaded data is saved in the MyDownloads folder in the USB tab display of the File Selection display To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder press the 8 A UP button in the File Selection display e When a USB storage device is not connected to the instrument during pur chase The downloaded data is saved in the MyDownloads folder in the User tab display of the File Selection display To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder press the 8 A UP button in the File Selection display Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages You can bookmark the page you re viewing and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future With the desired page currently selected press the 44 W BOOK MARK button The Bookmark display appears showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks The title of the curr
291. ount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1 2 parts the R1 R2 parameter is available when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part the LEFT parameter is available MONO POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically This setting can also be made from the VOICE CONTROL MONO button on the panel page 53 PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to MONO above BETIA Portamento Time The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next CONTROLLER MODULATION The MODULATION wheel can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch vibrato Here you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cut off Frequency For details about the filter see page 101 AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude volume LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch or the vibrato effect LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation
292. own varies depending on the selection display of the Voices Songs Styles Press the button corre sponding to P1 P2 in the display 5 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Song You can also select a Song by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute 6 Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 27 28 Operation of the Function Display In the Function display you can make detailed settings In the example here we ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display Press the FUNCTION button Categories of detailed settings are shown FUNCTION MENU p MASTER TUNE amp DIGITAL REC MENU I SONG SETTING i SPLIT BOINT X gt HARMONY ECHO FUNCTION HORD FIN RIN amp CONTROLLER mia MIDI REGIST SEQUENCE E PREEZE VOICE SET Set UTILITY 2 Press the D button to select the category CONTROLLER When the selected category is further divided into sub categories the tab s will be shown in the display CONTROLLER BE On the PSR S700 2 S ART shown in the illustration at right is displayed as 2 VOLUME 3 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the KEYBOARD PANEL tab When the setting is further divided into 7 ieee CONTROLLER additional settings a list will be shown KEYBOARD PANEL in the display Ler Ri T m2 P 1 INITIAL TO
293. p oRGAN ACCORDION amp T PERC amp HARMONICA DRUM KIT Je piano saxorHone O trumpet 0 JSHOIR amp CO Jorcan FLuTEs button O J STRINGS 9 FIUTE B AD O BRASS O SYNTH O JUSER SONG SELECT YAMAHA 082 00000 8 Oooo 00000 e LELLI SBBBBBBH Y STYLE category selection buttons nooner STYLE REGIST BANK 5 JPOP amp 9 SWING amp 9 LATIN ENTER SELECT MULTI PAD ROCK JAZZ TAINER SELECT button BALLAD O na amp B BALLRooM O worLo SELECT O DANCE Jcountry 0 JMOME Juser as REGIST BANK buttons PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 69 Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display File Selection Display Configuration Location drive of data Preset User USB Location where pre programmed Location where recorded or Location where data on USB storage device preset data is stored edited data is saved USB flash memory floppy disk etc is saved rimam 00 earutetioodeina etorean la Trumpet NU Om vorser Fo E SAVE FOLDER DEMO E SAVE FOLDER DEMO Hereafter in this manual any USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk drive etc will be referred to as USB storage device Data files and folders The data both pre programmed and your own original are saved as files
294. play one Voice with your left hand while you play a different Voice or even two layered Voices with your right Keyboard Parts Right 1 Right 2 Left Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part Right 1 Right 2 and Left You can combine these parts by using the PART ON OFF buttons to create a rich ensemble sound Keyboard Part Combinations Bi Playing a single Voice Right 1 part You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range This is used for nor mal performance for example with the piano Voice LEFT HOLD S ul E Right part NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNSS LEFT RIGHT RIGHT B Playing two Voices simultaneously Right 1 and 2 parts You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound LEFT HOLD LOWER UPPER o L9 E99 283 PART ON OFF WI Refer to page 85 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part LEFT RIGHT Ree Right 2 part Right 1 part Bi Playing different Voices with the left and right Hands Right 1 and Left parts You can play different Voices with the left and right hands For example try play ing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right LEFT RIGHT RIGHT LEFT HOLD LOWER UPPER o ee oJ o ART ON OFF Left part diei OCC As Right 1 part WINN Refer to page 86 for Voice selection operations for the Left part
295. playback a recording When you play back a music CD for exam ple a solo piano recording you re hearing the actual sound vibration in air of the acoustic instrument This is called audio data to distinguish it from MIDI data Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument audio data Recording Playback In the above example the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist s performance are captured in the recording as audio data and this is recorded to CD When you play back that CD on your audio system you can hear the actual piano performance The piano itself is not neces sary since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano and your speakers reproduce them What is MIDI Recording and play back the performance of a digital instrument MIDI data Recording Playback USB storage USB storage device device II Controller keyboard etc b S N f Generator Sequencer 2 NOTE In the case of digital instruments the audio signals are sent through output jacks such as AUX OUT on the instrument The controller and tone generator in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic exam ple Here the player s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data see illustration below In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano special recording equipment is needed How ever since the PSR S900 S7
296. plays are managed as a single file MUSIC FINDER All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file 4 Cn Select one of the tabs other than the PRESET by pressing the TAB 4 buttons Note that the file in the PRESET tab display is the file of factory programmed settings If you select it the factory programmed settings for the respective item will be restored This is the same results as on page 79 Restoring the Factory programmed Settings Independently by Item Save your file page 73 To recall your file select the tab and page to which you ve saved the file same tab and page as specified in step 4 and press the corre sponding A J button Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged Data that can be saved 1 Song Style Multi Pad Registration Memory Bank and Voice 2 Music Finder Record Effect MIDI Template and System File Protected Songs those with a Prot 1 Prot 2 indi cation at the upper left of the file name cannot be saved However Songs with a Prot 2 indication can be moved cut and paste operation to a USB flash memory Effect data includes the following Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console EFFECT EQ Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type PSR S9
297. plug Audio cable LN CAUTION S When the sound of an external device is output to the gt instrument first turn on the power to the external device 2 ga then to the instrument Reverse this order when you turn J the power off E Ra l2 NOTE S e Use only the L L R jack for connection with a monaural device 2 The instrument s MASTER VOLUME setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks 3 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 193 wn D gt o Q i ES lt 5 O E 5 c o E E g un u 8 gt o0 c uu Connecting Audio amp Video Devices Showing the Instrument s Display Con tents on a Separate TV Monitor Connect the instrument to an external TV monitor and you can have the current display contents lyrics for group sing alongs and the like or text files displayed on the TV For instructions on connecting see page 59 J NOTE Set the NTSC or PAL to correspond to the standard used by your video equipment When LYRICS TEXT is selected as the contents of the Screen Out signal only the lyrics of the song or text files are output via VIDEO OUT regardless of the display that is called up on the instrument Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for pro longed periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on dis tant objects to avoid eyestrain Video out settings Call up the op
298. ponents and possibly result in the components instrument overheating Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Otherwise the instrument TV or radio may generate noise PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 3 e Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to minimum Also be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level e When cleaning the instrument use a soft dry cloth Do not use paint thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths Handling caution Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument e Never insert or drop paper metallic or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Do not place vinyl plastic or rubber obj discolor the panel or keyboard e Do not rest your weight on or place heavy objects on the instrument an use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors ot use the instrument device or headphones for a long period of time at a or uncomfortable v
299. r Voice Style Song indications in the Selection display sssssseee page 76 e Displaying the bank select and program numbers in the Voice Selection display sese page 209 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 11 Introduction What can you do with the PORTATONE DEMO Explore the Demos page 24 These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument they introduce you to the various functions and features and give you hands on experience using the PSR S900 S700 SONG Playback previously recorded songs page 36 57 141 Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks LCD The large LCD together with the various panel buttons provides comprehensive and easy to understand control of the instrument s operations The lyrics music scores PSR S900 S700 and text data PSR S900 can also be displayed in the LCD YAM LCD CONTRAST AIL STANDBY au ON SONG SELECT SCORE lYRICS TEXT STYLE BALANCE MIXING L CONSOLE CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 ON OFF PoP amp SWING amp Ce JAZZ ROCK o Jj tatin o JENTER REPEAT GUIDE EXTRATR TR2 o J Co Co 9 sw o ra MASTER VOLUME O saur0om o RAS aa oce CO Jeountay Co AE usen CAL
300. r right hand right hand 6 Press the SONG E STOP button to stop playback 7 Press the 8 A V button to turn the P A T Performance Assistant off PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 45 46 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accom paniment Feature Style Playback The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing chords with your left hand This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra even if you re playing by yourself The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the Styles The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop jazz and many others YAMAHA oo o 4 Ho o La o ro So Lo a a o E a a c coco o 9o oe aD coo o oo O 5 25 2 22e geo M o o eegee Oo c 0800 9 o e GD O Doom Go Sooo thio ott one il i SYNC SYNC START STOP START STOP ACMP INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK Oo Oo o I I STYLE CONTROL Playing Mary Had a Little Lamb with the Auto Accompaniment Feature MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB Traditional Style Country Pop C C G C 3 2 1 2 3 2 3 5 6e e 6 o e 3 Feo o 5 o T HIT TT LITT TIT Uu mr nnm
301. ration Memory button and then instantly recall your cus tom panel settings by pressing a single button The registered settings for eight Reg istration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank file Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups Registering Custom Panel Setups 27 Set up the panel controls such as Voice Style effects and so on as desired Refer to the Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the Registration Memory function The Data List is available at the Yamaha website See page 5 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY MEMORY button The display for selecting the items to be registered appears Only the items selected here will be registered TEXT and MIC SETTING are not shown in the PSR S700 display To resister One Touch Settins Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons 1 4 To resister Resistration Memory 1 Select the desired Parameter srours from the GROUP SELECT below 2 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons 1 8D MEMORY GROUP SELECT DSTA 7 HARMONY TRANSPOSE MRRK A STYLE TEMPO SCALE AON VOICE PEDAL COMIC SETTING Yoff MULTI PAD TEXT Press the 2 A W 7 A V buttons to select items To cancel the operation press the I CANCEL button Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine whether the item should be registered or not by pressing the 8 A V
302. rator PITCH TO NOTE PART Determines which of the instrument parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is ON Adjusting the Microphone and Har mony Sound Press the MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY button MIC SETTING OCAL HARMONY TALK OFF HIC EFFECT OFF F VOCAL HARRHONHY OH MIC SETTING G VOCAL HARMONY m t E CE 0 m2 VOCAL TALK HIG EFFEGT HARHOHY OH OH __ OFF 2 Press the I MIC SETTING button to call up the MICROPHONE SET TING display 006S 3Sd euoudouotw e Surs PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 187 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound N CAUTION Settings in the OVERALL SET TING tab display are automat ically saved to the instrument when you exit from the dis play However if you turn the power off without exiting from this display the settings will be lost ey e e N a N B o o sien e o e S las o0 an 2 3 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the OVERALL SETTING tab dis play MICROPHONE SETTING Bl OVERALL SETTING EQ LOH EQ HIGH 4dB 8 0kHz 5dB RESSOR S6Hz 2dB 1 2kHz HOISE GATE SH TH UOCODER CONTROL SONG CHANNEL KB L OFF BBBHBBEB 4 Use the A J buttons to select the item parameter see below to be adjusted nn
303. re realistically It also lets you expressively control the Portamento effect depending on the selected Voice by playing legato When this button is off the part s Voice played polyphonically BI Portamento Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next The portamento time the pitch transition time can be set via the MIXING CONSOLE display page 93 DSP DSP VARI With the digital effects built into the instrument you can add ambience and depth to your music in a vari ety of ways such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP Digital Signal Processor effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part The DSP VARI Variation switch is used to change between variations of the DSP effect You could use this while you play for example to change the rotating speed slow fast of the rotary speaker effect Bid DSP Stands for Digital Signal Processor or Processing DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 53 Applying Harmony to Your Right hand Melody HARMONY ECHO Among the Voice Effects Harmony is one of the most impressive It automatically adds harmony parts to the notes you play with your right hand immediately giving you a more full and professional soun
304. regardless of the Source Root and Chord Root Fixed NTT to Bypass included in the preset data When you change Source Root Chord from the default and NTT BASS to OFF then CM7 to another chord the chord notes and recommended notes will also change a depending on the newly selected chord type Bn ira to the Pa set tings When the Play Root is C CM CMe CM7 CM 7 11 CM add9 CM 9 o e I I I a Ii I I 5 un 5 C R C C R C R C C C R C R C C R C C R C C R C c cic CR c cic c R C c cic C C R ga Caug Cm Cme Cm7 Cm 5 Cm 9 Cmz 9 Q mm mu m Hr mm mu mim 2 c 5 C R C C R R c CJR R C C c Ric c R cic RJC cic RJC oa EU Cm 11 CmM7 CmM7 9 Cdim Cdimz Cz C7sus4 a m mu mu TE wg mim T 2 C R cic C R R C C cic R C c c R C R R C R C c c c cic e 5 C75 c cz C703 cz09 C7 13 C7 9 oa pes 3 oO C R C C C C c C R C C R C R C cic c c c c C R C c c c zZ CMzaug C7aug C18 C145 Csus4 C 1 245 e II m ekl LT LLLI I Ii 8 C R C R RJC C R C C C C C R c c C C R C R 3 ne C Chord notes C R Recommended notes D 5 fo 3 E co A lt o un E NTR Note Transposition Rule This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord when converted from the Source Pattern
305. repeatedly in a loop you can record individual sounds one by one listening to the previous sounds as they play For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels RHY1 2 refer to the section Rules when recording non rhythm channels see below To continue recording with another channel simultaneously hold down the F REC CH button and press the appropriate 1 Y 8 V button to specify the channel then play the keyboard Stop recording by pressing the Style Control START STOP button Call up the display for selecting sections etc by pressing the EXIT button Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data Save the data in the Style Selection display page 73 Rules when recording non rhythm channels Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels i e C D E G A and B Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD chan nels i e C E G and B C Chord notes C R Recommended notes C R C C R C Using the data recorded here the auto accompaniment Style playback is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make dur ing your performance The chord which forms the basis for this note con version is called the Source Chord and is set by default to CM7 as in the example illustration above You can change the Source Chord its root and type from the PARAMETER di
306. res stop A ewer RD LOGS a Y gt 7 8 4 Y You can also select and call up links by using the DATA ENTRY dial and pressing the ENTER button bead ZJ E E E E Entering Characters See page 77 Entering Characters for instructions on entering characters within the website for inputting a password or searching for data Return to the Previous Web Page To return to a previously selected web page press the 1 A W BACK button To return to the page selected before pressing the 1 A W BACK button press the 2 A V FORWARD button Web page has been displayed ES Fe erres stop A ener M JT NE NA ADUN h 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A A A A A A Y Y Y Y Y Y jeujodu au O j eutQ 00Z5 006S 3Sd eui Sunoeuuo PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 173 Connecting the PSR S900 S700 Directly to the Internet Operations in the Special Website SSL SSL Secure Sockets Layer is an industry standard method for protecting web communications by using data encryption and other tools N CAUTION The Purchased data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off during download Refreshing a Web Page Canceling Loading of a Web Page To refresh a web page to make sure you have the latest version of the page or to try reloading press the 5 A REFRE
307. s Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practic ing page 36 step 1 3 2 Press the MIXING CONSOLE button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display MIXING CONSOLE SONG CHI 8 germ d MIXING pF CONSOLE 2 4 J Press the TAB lt 4 gt buttons to select the VOL VOICE tab A Press the MIXING CONSOLE button until MIXING CONSOLE SONG CH1 8 is shown at the top of the dis play 5 Press the E J button to select VOLUME 6 To raise the level of the desired channel s press the appropriate buttons 1 A V 8 A V If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE SONG CH1 8 display press the MIXING CON SOLE button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE SONG CH9 16 display If you don t know which channel s volume to raise Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below VOICE VOICE Bel g m l alal alea 0 6 Jo0 G JOl O0lO O Look at the channel indicators which light as the Song plays back Watching these as you listen can show you which channel you wish to boost o VOLUME 9 G O PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Displaying Music Notation Score You can view the music notation of the selected Song We suggest that you read through the music notation before starting to practice BET The instrument can display the music notation of commercially available music data or your recorded Songs The displayed notation is generated by the i
308. s WAV data saved to the connected USB storage device The file recorded is selected in step 1 7 page 63 For information about the operation method to change the name of the displayed file or to delete a file see the section File Folder Operations in the File Selection Dis play on page 72 However the operation that copies moves file folder to the User tab cannot be done here 3 Press one of the A J buttons corresponding to the file you want to listen to then press the 8 V AUDITION button The song is played back from the beginning and the display indicates the auditioning process This display closes automatically when auditioning is stopped Press the G CANCEL or EXIT button to stop audition ing A CAUTION Avoid frequently connecting disconnecting the USB storage device or turning the power on off too often Doing so may corrupt the USB storage device data or the auditioning data BEGG Audio recording is processed internally so auditioning volume will be appropriate when played on a computer There fore the playback sound might be distorted if you record at too high a volume In this case lower and adjust the volume of each part with Volume Balance display page 41 and the Mixing Console page 91 etc and try recording again 4 Press the EXIT button to return to the USB AUDIO RECORDER display shown in step 4 of Recording Your Performance as Audio on the previous page PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 65
309. s and use the 1 8 buttons or the DATA ENTRY dial nn PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 91 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE 6 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings Saving the PANEL PART display settings Register them to Registration Memory page 135 Saving the STYLE PART display settings Save them as Style data 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU 2 Press the B button to call up the STYLE CREATOR display 3 Press the EXIT button to close the RECORD display A Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display for sav ing your data then save it page 73 Saving the SONG CH 1 8 9 16 display settings First register the edited settings as part of the Song data SET UP then save the Song See the SONG CREATOR CHANNEL display SETUP item explana tion on page 166 About Parts PANEL PART In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE you can indepen dently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and LEFT SONG STYLE MULTI PAD and MIC parts PSR S900 The part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel BALANCE button STYLE PART A Style consists of eight separate channels Here you can adjust the level balance among these eight channels or parts These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel CHAN NEL ON O
310. s in the chord section of the keyboard This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance Press the SYNC STOP button before starting the Style playback BEM Enable Synchro Stop by pressing releasing keys Synchro Stop Window See page 109 Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main Section Set For example you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style page 110 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 49 About the section button INTRO MAIN ENDING etc lamps Green The section is not selected Red The section is currently selected Off The section contains no data and cannot be played Holding the LEFT part Voice Left Hold This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released Non decaying voices such as strings are held continuously while decay type voices such as piano decay more slowly as if the sustain pedal has been pressed Press the PART ON OFF LEFT button to turn the left hand part on PART SELECT eS See 2 Press the LEFT HOLD button to turn the Left Hold function on mem anl E IGHT RIGHT HOLD 1 2 LOWER UPPER O o o PART ON OFF 2 Learning How to Play Indicate Chords for Style Playback Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords If know the name of a chord but don t know how to play it you can have the instrum
311. s for Each Function The parameters below correspond to buttons 2 A W 8 A V and their availability depends on the selected control type For example if SUSTAIN is selected as the type the parameters RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and LEFT automatically appear in the display SONG STYLE MIC M PAD LEFT RIGHT1 RIGHT2 These specify the part s that will be affected by the pedal Available only on the PSR S900 UP DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected this determines whether the pitch change is raised or lowered RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected this determines the range of the pitch change in semitones Linked to the Mixing Console Pitch Bend Range page 93 set ting ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected this determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected this determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal all available drum kits are shown here letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal all sounds of the selected drum kit in KIT above are shown here This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 197 s 2n q 1900 YUM zu UNYSU INO SUISA wn D gt o Q i ES lt 5 O E 5 c o E E g un
312. s of the C major seventh scale C D E G A and B C Chord note C R Recommended note Stop recording Press the H STOP button or the panel MULTI PAD STOP button or the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button to stop recording when you ve fin ished playing the phrase 132 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Multi Pad Creating Multi Pad Creator 9 Listen back to your newly recorded phrase by pressing the appropri ate MULTI PAD button 1 4 To re record the phrase repeat steps 6 8 0 Turn Repeat of each pad On or Off by using the 1A V 4A V but tons If the Repeat parameter is on for the selected pad playback of the corre sponding pad will continue until the MULTI PAD STOP button is pressed If the Repeat parameter is off for the selected pad playback will end auto matically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached When you press the Multi Pads of which the Repeat is turned on during Song or Style playback playback will start and repeat in sync with the beat Turn Chord Match of each pad On or Off by using the 5 A V Multi Pads indicated withide fel 8 A W buttons lowing icon hand on fretboard If the Chord Match parameter is on for the selected pad the corresponding are created with special note pad is played back according to the chord specified in the chord section of ansPositions to produce the natural chord voicing of the gui the keyboard generated by turning ACMP on or specified
313. s or music genres Call up the operation display FUNCTION A MASTER TUNE SCALE TUNE TAB lt 4 gt SCALE TUNE 2 Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using the 6 A V 7 A V buttons Checkmark the box by pressing the 8 A button 3 Use the A B buttons to select the desired scale The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 87 wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c uu 2 88 Changing Pitch Cent In musical terms a cent is 1 100th of a semitone 100 cents equal one semitone Instantly recalling the desired scale Register the desired scale to the Registration Memory Be sure to checkmark the SCALE item when registering page 135 Change the following settings as necessary Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard TUNE Press the 3 A V button to select the note for tuning 2 Usethe 4A W 5 A V buttons to set the tuning in cents Determines the base note for each scale Press the 2 A W button to select the base note When the base note is changed the pitch of the keyboard is transposed yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes Preset Scale Types EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts with TEMPERAMENT each half st
314. s play back in a perfect loop be careful to stop recording right on the very last beat of the phrase just before the one of the next measure If it is difficult to get a good loop you may want to use the Step Record functions on the EDIT page Reference to Quick Guide pages The Multi Pads oer EIE page 52 Multi Pad Creating Multi Pad Cre ator This feature lets you create your original Multi Pad phrases and also allows you to edit existing Multi Pad phrases to create your own Multi Pad Realtime Recording OR N On Select a Multi Pad Bank to be edited or created page 134 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt F DIGITAL REC MENU Press the C button to call up the Multi Pad Creator display Press the TAB lt 4 button to select the RECORD tab Press any of the A B F and G buttons to select a Multi Pad to be edited or created If you want to create the Multi Pad data from scratch press the C button to call up an empty bank Press the H REC button to enter the recording standby status for the Multi Pad selected in step 5 Start recording Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the keyboard You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button This lets you record as much silence as you want before the start of the Multi Pad phrase If Chord Match is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded you should record using the note
315. s specified in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display page 19 MOVABLE DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals and as such are relative to the key The root note is indicated as Do For example in the key of G major the root note of So would be indicated as Do As with Fixed Do the indication differs depending on the selected language 3 Press the 8A OK button to apply the setting BOG Save the notation view settings The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song page 166 Muting the Right or Left hand Part Viewing the Score The Guide function indicates the notes you should play when you should play them and how long you should hold them down You can also practice at your own pace since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes cor rectly Here mute the right or left hand part and try practicing the part Practicing the Right hand Part TRACK 1 select a Song page 36 then press the SCORE button to call up the Score display 2 Turn the GUIDE button on SONG LYRICS SELECT SCORE TEXT 3 REPEAT GUIDE EXTRATR TR2 TR1 psu 44 gt gt oJ C JCeJC JC J L NEW SONG SYNC START PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 3 Press the SONG TR 1 button to mute the right hand part The indicator of the TR 1 button goes out You can now play that part by yourself 4 Press the SONG gt 11 PLAY PAUSE button to st
316. s sssi eoe tene entente 18 Changing the Display Language 19 Display Settings i e een tene ttr 19 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive FDD and Floppy Disks eee 22 Handling the USB Storage Device USB Flash Memory Floppy Disk etc s 23 Quick Guide PlayingithejiDemost ede 24 Operations in Basic Displays 26 OperationioitheMain Display 26 Operation of the File Selection Display 27 Operation of the Function Display 28 Playing Voices ARRIERE e 30 RlayimgiRreset Voices man NUN UNE 30 Practicing with the Preset Songs 36 Playing Back and Listening to Songs Before Practicing oeeo eee ee EEE AAE 36 Displaying Music Notation Score 39 Muting the Right or Left hand Part Viewing the SCONE ersero nesr asees En oeras EAEE SESER Eers E ES 40 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function 42 Recording Your Performance eeseees 43 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistantirechnologyz reese erees sete eee es 44 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature Style Playback 46 Playing Mary Had a Little Lamb with the Auto AccompanimentFeature a n a 46 MheMuktiikads a o ud 52 BlavingilgesviltilPacisge enu 52 Using Chord Match E EEE aee EEEE 55 VOCS EGR oS 53 Applying Harmony to Your Right hand Melody HARMONVY ECHO E ette ts
317. s the MAIN VARIATION A D buttons FILL DOWN Plays a fill in which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left FILL SELF Plays a fill in FILL BREAK Plays a break PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller AUX PEDAL jack FILL UP Plays a fill in which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right ENDING1 3 Same as the ENDING rit I III buttons FADE IN OUT Same as the FADE IN OUT button FINGERED FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes page 106 BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback If the fingering is set to Al FULL KEYBOARD the function does not work PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the 4 A W 8 A W buttons You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument RIGHT1 ON OFF Same as the PART ON OFF RIGHT 1 button RIGHT2 ON OFF Same as the PART ON OFF RIGHT 2 button LEFT ON OFF Same as the PART ON OFF LEFT button OTS Calls up the next One Touch Setting OTS Calls up the previous One Touch Setting BEC The Sostenuto and Portamento functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices even if they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals Adjustable Parameter
318. s the various chord types which are listed on the Data List avail able at the Yamaha website page 5 and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function page 50 FINGERED ON Accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered but the lowest note played BASS in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note allowing you to play on bass chords in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered even if you split the notes between your left and right hands for example playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right Al FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords based on the previously played chord etc Al FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced fingering type is engaged the instrument will auto matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything anywhere on the keyboard using both hands You don t have to worry about specifying the Style chords Although the Al Full Key board type is designed to work with many songs some arrangements Al may not be suitable for use with this feature This type is similar to Full Keyboard with the exception that less than three notes can be played to
319. score of the right hand left hand part is not displayed The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the right hand and left hand parts Set the Track 1 and Track 2 channels to AUTO page 145 The notation in the display is cut off with the middle of a measure starting on the next line When all the notes of a measure cannot fit on one line the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to the next line Dotted notes are indicated as rests e This is normal sometimes dotted notes are indicated as rests Chords are not displayed e If the selected Song does not contain chord data chords are not displayed Lyrics Karaoke Lyrics are not displayed e If the selected Song does not contain lyric data lyrics are not displayed Some of the lyrics overlap each other This happens for Songs containing many lyrics The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed When the background color is specified in the song data the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed xipueddy PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 213 Appendix Performance assistant technology Performance assistant technology does not work appropriately Press the SONG ll STOP button to stop Song play back then set the ACMP and PART ON OFF LEFT to off Finally restart the Song Video out PSR S900 The instrument display contents cannot be sent via video out and do not show on an external monitor
320. se is selected chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard irrespective of the split point setting If desired select a different fingering mode page 107 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual xipueddy 211 Appendix When playing back one Style and selecting another the newly selected Style doesn t play at the proper Tempo You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style playback This is because Song playback has priority The two ways shown below let you play back a Style and Song simulta neously Set the Song to Synchro Start standby then start the Style e Start the Style playback after playing back a Song The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a Style or a Voice after selecting a Song The level balance of the Parts can change and unex pected sounds can be produced because of the effects applied to each Part The Off setting is not shown for the Play Type parameter in the Assembly Style Creator feature The selected section is set to record enable Release the recording assignment by pressing the appropriate 1 V 8 V button in the recording channel display TAB 44 button BASIC tab F REC CH The channels BASS PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel
321. se the Songs in the SampleSongs folder 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION B SONG SETTING PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 3 Press the 8 A V button to turn the P A T Performance Assistant on SONG SETTING Follow Lishts GUIDE MODE Pas kes Sons Playback Pauses and waits Karao K for you to Play the correct shed eid note Playback continues when E Vocal CueTIME the correct note is played REPEAT iia SINGLE ALL RANDON HODE on oon GE GHANHEL SETTING LYRICS QUICK RUTO IRACKZ TRACKI CH SET LANGUAGE START CP R T foe AUTO E ENTERMATIONGL MTM 2 JAPANESE OFF E e a T 7 A Press the SONG gt 11 PLAY PAUSE button to start playback lt lt gt gt o o L NEW SONG START 5 Play the keyboard The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords no matter what keys you play It even changes the sound according to the way you play Try playing in the three different ways below Playing the left and right hand together Playing the left and right hand together Playing the left hand and right hand method 1 method 2 alternately UU A UU A MUI Play three notes at the Play several notes one after Play three notes at the same time with your the other with different fin same time with your right hand gers of you
322. serves as the basis for playing the sounds For example let s say you play a C quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument s keyboard Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note the electronic instrument puts out infor mation from the keyboard such as with what voice with which key about how strong when was it pressed and when was it released Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator Using these numbers as a basis for sound generation the tone generator plays the stored sampled note nu Example Keyboard Data Voice number with what voice 01 grand piano Note number with which key 60 C3 Note on when was it pressed Timing expressed and numerically note off when was it released quarter note Velocity strength at which it was played 120 strong Panel operations on the instrument such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices are processed and stored as MIDI data The auto accompaniment Styles and Songs also consist of MIDI data MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other by send ing and receiving compatible Note Control Change Program Change and various other types of MIDI data or messages The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmit ting note related data and var
323. sesesececsesesececscsesesecersvsvsveesevsvsvseneees e A METRONOME cscccssesesesesescscecescscecscescsescsceseevessceseeses SS MIC SETTING VOCAL HARMONY vs IX 9 MIXING CONSOLE eene e EG M e MODULATION wheel 4 AUTO FILL INJ siii cos ies ioco pte eto euer PMA INO Sse i ertet metae tette ente e MULTI PAD CONTROL 1 4 rs e B MULTI PAD CONTROL SELECT ees MULTI PAD CONTROL STOP es e BALANCE eosossosesessesososeocesosccvesoseccoscseososeoeeotosescceeeooccecceoon 38 MUSIC FINDER ELE 50 BREAK cee a A AE EU PU d 9 O C RELI AT ONE TOUCH SETTING JHH es CHANNEL ON OFF eeeeeeeeteenenennennnnnnnnnnnnne o CUTS DINK ou castos Sedt ere Dent eidem ied eed e D P DATA ENTRY dial eesssoosscossssssesocsssosssevssscoscsossvecoseceoccceocoo 43 PART SELCT PART ON OFF r 9 DEMO Meeesesosessosesessesoseseososossssessesososessosoosssesceccoosoososeoooe O PITCH BEND wheel E EEEE S AO A DIRECT ACCESS o Dr Kiel ORIS ceci Pena e tod ra deter ivre haad ead Indra Beet e R DSP Lies ted e E REGIST BANK l erret e REGISTRATION MEMORY 1 18 e e E BEPENTIS testen dateien E 9 ENDING rit 0 0 cccccsesececcsscsccesesssecsesesececseseseceeeees S PENTIER 4 S cre cce eve ORG E 45 D ll dua EE 60 IS ORE EA E EE tender Pike aie E o EXTRA W
324. shown at left indicates the process by which the Style is played back This does not apply to the rhythm track These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature Source Pattern There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback notes depending on the particular root note and chord type that are selected The Style data is appropriately con verted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance This basic Style data that you create with the Style Creator is referred to as the Source Pat tern Note Transposition This parameter group features two parameters that deter mine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be con verted in response to chord changes Other Settings Using the parameters of this group you can fine tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play For exam ple the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shift ing the pitch to an authentic range ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instru ment e g very low notes of a piccolo sound The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of Basic Operation for Editing Styles page 124 Press the A B button to select the edit menu page 129 BASIC STYLE CREATOR Straight8Pop Ly Yeroc 200 GN PARAMETER MAGN CHANNEL RHYTHI e
325. sic score examples The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section Basic Operations for Step Recording on page 152 a Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated e from the recorded MIDI data it may not appear exactly the same 1 2 6 7 as shown here The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following opera tion step numbers m Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display Press the G button to select mf SONG CREATOR NewSong STEP RECORD n 001 1 0000 End A es s El e em D mm 3 E J BAR ipd CLE 001 0000 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 A A A A A A A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Press the H button to select Tenuto About the items which can be Press the I button to select normal note type selected via the G H I but tons Press the 6 A V button to select the quarter note length Yes pagas Om BR W NY sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea BuIA Play the keys C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 and A3 in order according to the notation example mimi mu SONG CREATOR HewSong STEP RECORD ava 19Z6PPQ 001 1 0000 Hote t3 79 0000 1900 n 001 2 0000 Hote D3 79 0000 1900 001 3 0000 Hote E3 79 0000 1900 v
326. splay on page 128 Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord the chord notes and recommended notes will also change For details on chord notes and recommended notes see page 129 Style Creator Deleting the recorded rhythm channel RHY 1 2 To delete a specific instrument sound simultaneously hold down the E RHY CLEAR but ton from the display where the recorded channels are shown and press the appropriate key N CAUTION The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation page 73 Any desired chord or chord pro gression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections Changing the Source Chord If you want to record the pattern with a Source Chord other than CM7 set the PLAY ROOT and PLAY CHORD parameters on the PARAMETER page page 128 before recording PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 121 se Ais jueuirueduioooy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis Style Creator Step Recording EDIT The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of Realtime Recording page 119 STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat PUSS CRUE SAM Meee EDIT 1928PPG n 001 1 0000 001 1 0000 0000 0020 001 1 0000 0000 0020 F 001 1 0960 0000 0020 001 2 0000 Hote 0000 0020 G 001 2 0960 Hote 0000 0020 8 001 2 0960 Hote F 1 32 0000 0020 p 001 3 0000 Mote ci
327. stration Memory setting containing a User USB Voice the instru ment selects the Preset voice on which the User USB Voice is based then applies the relevant parameter set tings to it so that your original User USB Voice is sounded Songs cannot be selected This may be because the language settings have been changed Set the appropriate language for the Song file name e If the size of the Song data is large about 300 KB or greater the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be read by the instrument Song playback does not start New Song a blank Song has been selected Make sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection display page 36 e Make sure to press the SONG gt EE PLAY PAUSE button The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG Bil STOP button In the case a Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name the original file may not be in the same folder It cannot be played back unless the original file showing Prot 2 Orig at the upper left of the Song name is in the same folder In case of a Song to which write protect has been applied Prot 2 Edit is shown at the upper left of the Song name the original file name may have been changed Rename the file with the original file name so that Prot 2 Orig is show
328. t 1 Prot 2 is indicated at the upper left side of the file names are included in the copied files These protected Songs cannot be copied However Songs with a Prot 2 indication can be moved cut and paste operation to a USB flash memory 2 Music Finder Record Effect MIDI Tem plate and System Data 2 Insert connect the backup USB storage device destination Call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt SYSTEM RESET Press one of the F I buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data Select the appropriate USB tab to which you want to save the data by using the TAB lt gt buttons Save your data page 73 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 81 c 98 5 T S 2 O 3 wn amp ea 82 Data Backup 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 Insert connect the backup USB storage device destination 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt OWNER 3 Press the D BACKUP button to save the data to the USB storage device To restore the data press the E RESTORE button in step 3 above BET e It takes a few minutes to complete the backup restore operation Backup data which has not been created on the PSR 5900 5700 cannot be restored N CAUTION Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER dis play before restoring If the songs are not moved the oper ation deletes the data
329. t the volume balance of each channel by using the 1A V 8 A V buttons Press the C H VOICE but tons in step 5 to select the Voice which you want to change Then press one of the 1 A W to x s 8 A V buttons to call up the You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation Voice selection display for the of the SETUP page 166 channel Make sure to checkmark the VOICE item in step 2 of the Setup procedure N OQ BW N gt a o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TC c o0 c B oO I 9 UO ob c T 144 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions Changing Voices 4 The operation steps are the same as in the Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel see page 144 Press the H button to select the VOICE Press one of the 1 A V 8 A V buttons to call up the Voice selec tion display for the channel 7 Press one of the A J buttons to select a Voice 8 You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup operation page 166 Make sure to checkmark the VOICE item in step 2 of the Setup procedure Practicing Songs with the Guide Functions The Guide functions provide convenient learning and practicing tools to help you master the instrument By pressing the SCORE button you can have the notation of the song displayed showing the notes you should play and when you should play them for ease in learning
330. ted Style CHANNEL Selects the desired channel part to which Dynamics is to be applied ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied in other words which notes in the part s are emphasized with the Dynamics settings STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type above will be applied The higher the value the stronger the effect EXPAND COMP Expands or compresses the range of velocity values Values higher than 100 expand the dynamic range while values lower than 100 com press it BOOST CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section channel Values above 100 boost the overall velocity while values below 100 reduce it Style Creator Editing Data for Each Channel CHANNEL The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of Basic Operation for Editing Styles page 124 Press the A B button to select the edit menu see below STYLE CREATOR Cool8Beat CUES CRESS a RE ae CHANNEL MALLIA O 0 CHRHHEL RHYTHH2 n 1 QUANTIZE a vELocrrv CHANGE BRR COPY BAR CLEAR REMOVE EVENT 5 E ds X 2 Bak CHANNEL Use the 1 A V 2A V CHANNEL buttons to select the channel to be edited The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display Use the 4A W 8 A V buttons to edit the data For details on editable par
331. ted disabling the speaker out put Unplug the headphones The FADE IN OUT button is on muting the sound Press the FADE IN OUT button to turn the function off Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON page 207 Not all simultaneously played notes sound You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony page 215 of the instrument When the maximum polyphony is exceeded the earliest played notes will stop sounding letting the latest played notes sound The keyboard volume is lower than the Song Style playback volume The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low Raise the volume in the BALANCE display page 41 Keys do not sound at the proper pitch Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on the operation display page 44 Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch The Scale parameter has probably been set to some thing other than Equal changing the tuning system of the keyboard Make sure Equal is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune display page 87 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard Some Voices have a looping sound Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches depending upon the voice This is normal and is a result of the instrument s sam pling system Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers This is norm
332. ter in the display of the instrument enabling various useful possibilities such as the showing of lyrics chord names and text notes 1 Connect the USB storage device containing the text file to USB TO DEVICE terminal 2 Press the LYRICS TEXT button to display the text When the lyrics are displayed press the 1 Y TEXT button to display the text 3 Press the 5 A W 6 A Y TEXT FILE buttons to call up the Text selection display 4 Press the TAB 44 gt buttons to select the desired TAB 5 Double click one of the A J buttons to select a text file If the text is long use the TAB 4 gt buttons to select other pages BEGG An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn pages page 194 The following additional settings are available in the TEXT display LYRICS Switches the screen to the Lyrics display Clears the text from the display the text data itself is not erased F FIXED 11 pt point P PROPORTIONAL 16 pt Determines the text type fixed or proportional and font size TEXT FILE Opens the Text selection display Allows changing of the background picture of the text display as in the Lyrics display described above The background setting is common for both the Lyr ics display and Text display BEG The text file which is copied in the USER tab can be showed Line feed or carriage return is not automatically performed in the instrument If a sentence is not displayed in its entirety bec
333. the J MULTI SELECT button press the A B buttons Displaying specific types of event FILTER You can select the event types to be displayed in the CHORD and 1 16 tab displays This is convenient for example when you wish to have only the note events shown page 169 N CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 Chord and Section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on this display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 167 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea SuIsA un o0 c o N o0 c z UO LL TO c o0 c uc eG Qo 9 ob c TD 168 Recording Your Performance to MIDI About Clock A unit of note resolution The Quantize size is the number of clocks per quarter note On the PSR S900 S700 one clock is equal to 1 1920th of a quarter note PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual About the events shown in the display SONG CREATOR Eres e resale 4r 0000 1536 ns D3 dU 0000 1536 H 3E e ES Ed 0000 1536 rr STE F3 35 0000 1536 B 71 E HeH 0000 1536 Hote n o0 1536 a 0000 1536 Example 001 1 1440 T L Glock Beat Measure number BAR Indicates the location position of the corresponding event Same as the indication at the lower left of the display Indic
334. the File Selection display you can select the Voice page 30 Song page 36 Style page 46 etc In the example here we ll call up and use the Song Selection display SONG Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song Selection display 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the desired drive PRESET USER USB About PRESET USER USB PRESET issons Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data USER ees Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data USB cents USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk drive etc which is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal Bii Hereafter in this manual any USB storage device such as USB flash memory floppy disk drive etc will be referred to as USB storage device 3 Select a folder if necessary Several Songs may be together in a folder In this case the folder s will SONG appear in the display see the illustration a PRISTINE TR at right Press one of the A J buttons E jampleSonzs Eoo to select a folder Press the 8 A UP button to call up the next highest level folder A select a page if the display has several pages When the drive contains more than ten Songs the display is divided up into several pages The page indica tions are shown at the bottom of the display Press one of the 1 A 7 A buttons to select a page Bid The number of pages sh
335. the internal components and possibly result in the instrument overheating Air Vents co 080 g0000 Z CAUTION In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment always switch on the power of the PSR S900 S700 before switching on the power of the amplified speak ers or mixer and amplifier Likewise always switch off the power of the PSR S900 S700 after switching off the power of the amplified speak ers or mixer and amplifier PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 17 uononpo4gu Setting Up Music Rest The PSR S900 S700 is supplied with a music rest that can be attached to the instru ment by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel c o pe o 2 me o Ss Zz c Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of head phones is plugged into the CAUTION A PHONES jack Do not listen with the head phones at high volume for long periods of time Doing so may cause hearing loss 18 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Changing the Display Language This determines the language used in the display for messages file names and character input Call up the operation display FUNCTION gt J UTILITY gt TAB lt 4 gt OWNER uononpo4qu 2 Press the 4A W 5 A V button to select a
336. the models PSR S900 S700 However the data may not be perfectly compatible depending on the specifications of each model About recalling setups trom a USB storage device When recalling the setups including Song Style file selec tion from a USB storage device make sure that the appropriate USB storage device including the registered Song Style is con nected into the USB TO DEVICE terminal PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Saving the Registered Panel Setups You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file Press the REGIST BANK and buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display 2 Press the 6 V button to save the Bank file page 73 CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER EDIT REGIST BANK i gt m 7 z n GIE Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Press the REGIST BANK and buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display REGIST BANK Y 2 Press one of the A J buttons to select a bank REGISTRATION BANK USB1 wmmm REGIST E up HANE CUT COPY PASTE DELETE SAVE FOLDER EDIT MISI 3 Press one of the green lit numbered buttons 1 8 in the Registra tion Memory section Recalling the Registered P
337. the same channel Recording each channel with the same tempo Use the Metronome function page 34 to record each channel with the same tempo Keep in mind that the metronome sound is not recorded Pausing and restarting your recording See page 148 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 150 While holding the SONG REC button press the 1 A W 8 A V buttons to set the desired channels to REC While holding the SONG REC but ton press the 2 A button to set the channel 2 to REC Normally the keyboard parts should be recorded to channels 1 4 the Multi Pads should be recorded to 5 8 and the Styles should be recorded to channels 9 16 To cancel the channel selection press the SONG REC button again MAIN UPPER OCTAVE 0 SPLIT POINT S F 2 L F 2 RIGHT1 TRANSPOSE 0 Live ge CATHAY Live RIGHTZ ZA Strings G LEFT Cool fim GalaxyEP MULTI PAD E it PADI Jles Gtr16BtCut1 REGIST M PADZ 8 NewRegist EEy NewBank CHANNEL ON OFF 4 5 On On 12 13 On On 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 f BBBHBHE Use the C D buttons to select the desired part for the channel to be recorded This determines which part keyboard or Style Rhythm 1 2 Bass etc or Multi Pad is recorded to each of the channels selected in step 2 Default channel part assignments are shown in the section About Song channels pa
338. three keyboard parts RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 and LEFT As the default the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1 4 Nor mally the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1 4 About Style parts As the default each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9 16 respectively as shown above Normally the Style parts should be recorded to the channels 9 16 RHYTHM This is the basic part of the Style containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns Usually one of the drum kits is used BASS isses The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style CHORD This is the rhythmic chord backing commonly used with piano or guitar Voices PAD s eter This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings organ choir etc PHRASE This part is used for punchy brass stabs arpeggiated chords and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting About Multi Pad parts As the default each of the Multi Pads is assigned to the channels 5 8 respectively as shown above The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 151 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr Recording Your Performance to MIDI Step Recording This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords Basic Operatio
339. tination when multiple USB storage devices are connected To check the number of the USB storage device USB1 and USB2 etc press the A B F G button on the display of step 4 and change the tab Press the EXIT button to return to the previous display ooU 6 Start recording by pressing the J REC button then start your performance When recording begins the RECORDING indication on the display changes to red PSR S900 and the elapsed recording time is displayed N CAUTION Avoid frequently connecting disconnecting the USB storage device or turning the power on off too often Doing so may corrupt the USB storage device data or the recording data P R 7 Stop recording by pressing the J STOP button The file name is automatically named and is always given a new unique name and a message indicating the file name is displayed BEGG The recording operation continues even if you close the Recording display by pushing the EXIT button To stop the recording press the J STOP button on the Recording display PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Playing Back the Recorded Performance Play back the recorded performance 1 can up the USB AUDIO RECORDER display USB E USB AUDIO RECORDER 2 Press the 7 A V 8 A V AUDITION button to display the audio file
340. tion parameter press the E button MIXING CONSOLE Al 3430813 LIE EFFECT EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT BLOCK DSP IRIGHT11 A CRTEGORY REUERB F TYPE HRLL3 VR O B 4 PRRRMETER VALUE G REVERB TIME 2 88 DIFFUSION 5 10 c INITIAL DELAY 28 dus H HPF CUTOFF 63Hz C0 b LPF CUTOFF 7 0kHz 3 PARAMETER VALUE O REVERB TIME i 4s J This value is applied when VARIATION is ON CRTE BLOCK GORY TYPE PARAHETER VALUE Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the 4A W 5 A V buttons Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type 2 Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the 6 A V 7 A V buttons If you have selected the REVERB CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step 5 Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing 8 A W button 3 Press the I SAVE button to call up the display for saving your origi nal effect Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance MIXING CONSOLE A Use the 3 A W 6 A W buttons to select the destination for saving the effect The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block MIXING CONSOLE UOL UOIGE FILTER USER EFFECT BLOCK DSP4 RIGHT1 A CATEGORY REVERB TYPE tHALL3 MEMORY
341. to straight eighth notes completely elimi nating any triplet feel However if you use the eighth note eighth note triplet setting both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized A setting of 100 pro duces exact timing If a value less than 100 is selected notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage Applying less than 100 quantization lets you preserve some of the human feel in the recording Quarter note length eo Original data re rI e t Quantizing strength 100 Quantizing strength 50 te e __ e _o Deleting the data of the specified channel DELETE menu You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using the 1 A W 8 A W buttons then press the D EXECUTE button to execute the operation About Quantize size resolu tion The Quantize size or resolution is the number of clocks per quar ter note PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 165 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea Sursr Recording Your Performance to MIDI Bi Mixing merging the data of the specified two channels MIX menu This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a different channel It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another SOURCE
342. to your audi ence page 191 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Recording Your Performance as Audio USB Audio Recorder PSR S900 Oooo 00000 80 00000 8 o ooo ce e o c coco o 995 GO c mOoo oe995 ado Here you ll learn how to record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device For example by connecting a gui tar microphone or other device to the instrument you can record an ensemble performance of guitar and keyboard together or record yourself singing along with Song playback The performance data is saved as a WAV file of conventional CD quality 44 1 kHz 16 bit Since it is possible to play back the file on computer a listener doesn t need to have the par ticular instrument in order to hear the performance This makes it possible to easily share your performances and recordings with your friends via e mail record your own CDs or upload the recordings to websites for many others to enjoy as well Recording methods on the instrument include MIDI recording as well as audio recording For details about the difference between audio and MIDI recording see page 201 For specific instructions on MIDI recording refer to page 147 BET In order to record your own original CD you ll need a CD R drive or compatible device Refer to the manual that came with your specific computer for details When you attach a recor
343. ton essen P 53 89 OW CE DUttOFs cortice en rere ne eren coe vore teres P 53 SUSTAIN DuttOrn occid eet oo debet eoe obrera P 53 MONOT DttOI serico etre e roe CER rece ere a RUE XEP RE Le OR P 53 IDSP DUttOLis corii enpa ve EEA P 53 VARIT b ttoni these ctr ros C e eei es P 53 UPPER OCTAVE UPPER OCTAVE buttons een P 68 Drum Kit icons Data List See page 5 REAR PANEL DCIN terminal eese cetero exo coe dns P 16 For quick reference also see the alphabetically sorted Panel Button Chart on page 220 For information on the jacks and connectors located on the rear panel see page 193 PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 15 uononpo4gu c S 5 o 3 me o 5 c 16 N WARNING A CAUTION tor during any PSR S900 S700 N CAUTION Playing the Keyboard PSR S900 Use the speci fied adaptor PA 300B PA 300 or an equivalent recom mended by Yamaha only PSR S700 Use the speci fied adaptor PA 301 PA 300B PA 300 or an equiva lent recommended by Yamaha only PSR S900 S700 The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable dam age to the PSR S900 S700 and may even pose a seri ous shock hazard ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUT LET WHEN THE PSR S900 S700 IS NOT IN USE Never interrupt the power sup ply e g unplug the AC adap record operation Doing so can result in a loss o
344. ton Entering numbers First select one of the following A B C full size alphabet ABC CASE half size capital alphabet and case half size lowercase alphabet Then press and hold down the appropriate button 2 A V 5A V GA and 7 A button for a while or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected Inserting a Character 1 Move the cursor to the desired position Use the same operation as in Deleting Characters above 2 Press the 2 A V 6 A V or 7 A buttons to enter numbers and symbols 3 Press the 8 A OK button to enter characters Entering a Space 1 Move the cursor to the desired position Use the same operation as in Deleting Characters above 2 Press 6 V button to call up the mark list 3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space blank of the mark list and press the 8 A OK button Converting into Kanji Japanese language When the input hiragana characters are shown in reverse display highlighted press the 1 A ENTER button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji To actually enter the change press the 1 A 8 A OK button or enter the next character When the input hiragana characters are shown in reverse dis play highlighted Re converting the characters into other kanji Press the 1 A ENTER button Changing the reversed area Use the DATA ENTRY dial Changing the converted kanji back to
345. touch sensitivity of the keyboard s t rtt teret eee nene et oa be ue bn e edo vb dne page 33 Turning Initial Touch on or off for each keyboard part RIGHT1 2 LEFT ene page 53 Setting the Modulation wheel for each keyboard part RIGHT 1 2 LEFT nnns page 33 Practicing the keyboard performance s Using the Metronom Ereann n i n Pe eeu dii metet taut iret es page 34 e Displaying and playing along with the music notation of the song during playback page 39 Selecting the programs of the PSR S900 S700 A page 83 Sty eS Jii Gc e Heber seo i PARED RR EREH ERR ORG RI SM GENRE E TRNO TORTE IEEE page 106 Multi Pad b nks 5 eh rtt netter re REO GE GIRONE INR OK E RES page 132 SOM BS nn ia nemi ant ED OO one tme dt ODE eH DR REO EE EE page 140 MUSIC Finder reCOrds a ciere Go e pere o Ee eb RR Ee E E ERN RR onde tesa sta pages 55 111 Registration Memory Dark a neos eso coe a ou Od ham re oi Eo n TOR PP Eee EOS page 138 Registration Memofy Dutmiber eie ro dr ero ier hr rH RR OF RORIS UR Sai EADE page 138 One Touch Setting numbers nerit crore ne cere hie Grade tiro i Ir EO Ei rad rre Eo dope page 51 e THaitnony EClo typ6Sscesa S prose nio eto ped bee Geo rie todo ne P Pr IEEE page 89 s MIDI templatesssm eia ee erect db dee Ebene i dett eto aS page 206 BIE CE TYPOS c Ett page 95 Vocal Harmony types PSRSS900 5 2 5 nh
346. trument Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer Backing up data to a computer and organizing files folders Computer Instrument PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media then connecting the storage device to the instrument Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files and Style File formatted Style files cre ated on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer Once you ve copied the data connect the device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal of the instrument and play back the data on the instrument Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device m USB storage device Computer Instrument Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument ue USB storage device USB TO DEVICE terminal H
347. try Bluegrass 150 A Bridge To Cross Troub PowerBallad 78 gt Bright amp Guiding Light EasyListening 76 FAVORITE A Cosy Life In Italy OrganBallad 88 A Day s Difference 70 sT Theme 126 A Divorce In The Country CountrySwin 126 A Feeling Of Love Tonig MovieBallad 1 A Fire Lighter Unplugged1 A Great Way To Spend T JazzClub A Jolly Good Fellow 6 8March 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the ALL tab The ALL tab contains the preset records C Em 3 Select the desired record by using the following four search categories To select a record press the 2A V 3 A V buttons BET You can also select the desired record by using the DATA ENTRY dial then press the ENTER button to execute Searching the records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria page 111 MUSIC Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record letting you easily find the desired music style Bit Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically When sorting records by song title use the 1 A W button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically Simultaneously press the A W buttons to move the cursor to the first record STYLE This is the preset Style assigned to t
348. tton to convert the input chord change data into the Song data Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 N CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without exe cuting the Save operation page 73 Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted page 154 Entering fill ins Turn the STYLE CONTROL AUTO FILL IN button to ON and simply press one of the STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARI ATION A B C DJ buttons The appropriate fill in section plays and then automatically goes to the selected MAIN VARIATION A B C D pattern playback PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 161 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea BuIA Recording Your Performance to MIDI Editing a Recorded Song You can edit the Songs you ve recorded with any recording method Quick Recording Multi Track Recording or Step Recording Basic Editing Operation Select a Song for editing 2 Call up the operation display FUNCTION F DIGITAL REC MENU 3 Press the A button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record or edit Songs DIGITAL REC MENU Ji SONG CREATOR amp STYLE CREATOR rr i c tiv MULTI PAD CREATOR IS 4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB lt gt buttons a
349. tton to save your edited Vocal Harmony type page 73 N CAUTION The settings here will be lost if you change to another Vocal Harmony type or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 006S 3Sd euoudoaotw e Surs ey e e ko ce N B o o sien e o e S las o0 an 2 186 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display VOCODER TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro phone sound when the Harmony mode page 190 is set to VOCODER CHORDAL TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro phone sound when the Harmony mode page 190 is set to CHORDAL HARMONY GENDER TYPE Determines whether the gender of the harmony sound is changed or not Off The gender of the harmony sound is not changed Auto The gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically LEAD GENDER TYPE Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound i e the direct microphone sound will be changed Please note that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the selected type When set to Off three harmony notes are pro duced Other settings produce two harmony notes Off No gender change occurs Unison No gender change occurs You can adjust the LEAD GENDER DEPTH below Male The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal Femal
350. ttons is pressed 1 Call up the operation display FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt CONFIG 2 2 Select the B 2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS button and use the 1 A W 2 A V buttons to change how the Voice selection display is opened e OPENS amp SELECT Opens the Voice selection display with the top first voice of the voice category automatically selected when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed With the default settings the OPEN amp SELECT function is turned on OPEN ONLY Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice when one of the VOICE category selec tion buttons is pressed PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 2 Press one of the VOICE buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice selec tion display VOICE GUITAR amp ACCORDION amp PERC amp Co Jruno o J ass Jorcan O JHaRMonica O J DRUM KIT Je piano CO saxopHone O trumpet 0 JSHOIR amp CO Jorcan FLUTES FLUTE amp SYNTH amp O STRINGS JwoopwiNp O _J BRASS O JEx O USER 3 Press one of the A J buttons to select the desired Voice DMIA The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name For details on the character istics see page 83 You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the 7 A INFORMATION button PSR S900 only e You can instantly jump back to the Main display
351. type of characters CASE case may be entered The following half size marks cannot be entered for a file folder name Mitre When entering a password for a website or the WEP key for wire less LAN connection the charac ters are converted to asterisks for security purposes PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual TT c S Z o Cc O o a Es ea Basic Displays Main Display and File Selection Display In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks with the excep tion of kanakan and half size katakana you can call up the mark list by pressing the 6 W button after selecting a charac ter before actual entry of a char acter 4 Press the 8 A OK button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the DATA ENTRY dial and press the 7 W DELETE button To delete all charac ters on the line at once press and hold the 7 V DELETE button e Entering special character marks Japanese and Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the 6 W button before actual entry of the character Entering marks 1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor press the 6 W button to call up the mark list 2 Use the DATA ENTRY dial to move the cursor to the desired mark then press the 8 A OK but
352. u to easily compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing You can also use it to practice duet pieces by yourself if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand 1 Press the REC and 8 STOP buttons simultaneously A blank Song for recording is automatically set psi lt lt gt gt BG EO 2 Select a Voice page 30 The selected Voice will be recorded 3 Press the REC button psi lt lt gt gt T J ED l Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard A start recording 5 Press the SONG m STOP button to stop recording A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears To close the message press the EXIT button lt lt Co a a L NEW S L SYNC START A 1 6 Press the SONG gt 11 PLAY PAUSE button to play back the recorded performance psu lt lt gt gt Ls bd CJC L NEW SONG START PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 43 44 PDT j 7 Save the recorded performance Press the SONG SELECT button to call up the Song selection display 2 Press the TAB lt gt buttons to select the appropriate tab USER USB etc to which you want to save the data Select USER to save the data to internal memory or select USB to save the data to a USB storage device 3 Press the 6 V SAVE button to call up the file naming display 4
353. ull of atmosphere and ambience Cool These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of elec tric instruments thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming Sweet These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha s sophisti cated technology and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural you ll swear you re playing the real thing Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys letting you play the sounds from the keyboard Organ Flutes This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Voice Set to adjust the vari ous footages and craft your own original organ sounds See page 103 for details PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 83 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Adjusting the volume balance among parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts in the BALANCE display page 41 wn kh 2 o gt o0 c Lu T c S o0 c Z G o 2 L ob c uu 2 Specifying the split point the border between the right and left hand range See page 110 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously The PSR S900 S700 keyboard features various functions and performance conve niences that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument It allows you to play several different Voices together in a layer or
354. ut when it is set to L63 gt H only the lead vocal is output 006S 3Sd euoudouotw e Surs PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 189 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound e MODE All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce har mony in different ways The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony mode and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice The three modes are described below AUTO When the ACMP or LEFT is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL In all other cases the mode is set to VOCODER VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard and or song data You can specify whether the Vocoder effect is controlled by your keyboard performance or by the Song data page 189 CHORDAL The harmony notes are determined by the following three types of chord chords played in the chord section of the keyboard with the ACMP turned on chords played in the LEFT Voice section of the keyboard with the ACMP turned off and the LEFT turned on and chords contained in song data for control ling the harmony Not available if the song does not contain any chord data e CHORD The following parameters determine which data in a recorded song is used for chord detection OFF Chords are not detected from the song data XF Chords of XF format are use
355. uter interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the instrument and connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the inter face MIDI cable MIDI IN terminal MIDI OUT SPEM terminal p L o Ei ENG d n p DT MIDIOUT MIDI IN It terminal terminal S Instrument CS Computer with MIDI interface installed The second connection possibility involves a sepa rate external MIDI interface connected to the com puter via a USB port or a serial port modem or printer terminal Using standard MIDI cables con nect the MIDI OUT terminal of the external interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the instrument and con nect the MIDI OUT terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface USB port or serial port modem or MIDI cable printer terminal Te MIDI IN i i 1 terminal MIDI interface z isum lo d r m 2 i OA ser ee LETTE J terminal lt A Instrument Computer DCA Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your com puter Connecting to a USB type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device via the USB TO DEVICE terminal There are two ways of using the USB TO DEVICE ter minal E By connecting the USB type LAN adaptor you can directly
356. vailable Song data certain settings related to the Song such as voice selection volume etc are recorded to the first measure before the actual note data When Quick Start is set to ON the instru ment reads all initial non note data of the Song at the highest possible speed then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible with a mini mum pause for reading of data When Quick Start is set to ON a Song is played back directly from the first note which may be in the middle of a measure If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has silence prior to the first note turn Quick Start OFF Call up the operation display FUNCTION B SONG SETTING 2 Press the 7 V QUICK START buttons to turn the Quick Start OFF Operations for Song Playback Parameter Lock You can lock specific parame ters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 137 For songs without chord data the chord name will not be dis played in the Main display dur ing Song playback PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 143 sduos Sunip3 pue Bunea BuIA Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination etc MIXING CONSOLE Reading Song data automatically when inserting a USB storage device You can have the instrument automatically call up the first Song not con tained in a
357. ve accumulated on it Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators If you notice any abnormality a gt e Do not put burning items such as candles on the unit A burning item may fall over and cause a fire and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects e f the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or anything over it smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected Do not open by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply AC power adaptor Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally e When removi
358. ven when the power switch is in the STANDBY position electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level When you are not using the instrument for a long time make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha PORTATONE We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference About this Owner s Manual and Data List This manual consists of the following sections Owner s Manual Introduction page 12 Please read this section first Quick Guide page 24 This section explains how to use the basic functions Basic Operation page 66 This section explains how to use the basic operations including display based controls Reference page 83 sss This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various func tions Appendix page 210 ss This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and Specifications Data List The Data List contains various important preset content lists such as Voices Styles Effects as well as MIDI related information The Data List is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Libr
359. waiting for you to play the notes cor rectly When you play the correct notes Song playback continues Follow Lights was developed for the Yamaha Clavinova series This function is used for practicing purposes with built in lamps on the Clavinova keyboard indicating the notes to be played Even though the PSR S900 S700 does not have these lamps you can use the same function by following the indications in the displayed notation with the Song Score function Any Key With this function you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key any key is OK in time with the rhythm Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music and the Song playback continues For Singing Karao key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger while you sing along This is useful for singing to your own performance Song playback pauses waiting for you to sing Simply play a key on the keyboard and the Song playback continues Vocal CueTIME PSR S900 This function lets you practice singing with the proper pitch Song playback pauses waiting for you to sing When you sing with proper pitch Song playback continues Turning playback channels of the Song on and off A Song consists of 16 separate channels You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off Usually CH 1 is assigned to TR 1 button CH 2 is assigned to TR
360. wing you to save files and play back music data from the devices 2 NOTE Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device You can check this in the display called up by the following oper ation FUNCTION J UTILITY TAB lt 4 gt MEDIA Select the device by using the A B buttons in this display and press F PROPERTY BM Even with a computer connected to the USB TO HOST terminal and a USB storage device connected to the USB TO DEVICE ter minal you cannot access the USB storage device from the com puter via the instrument Formatting USB storage media For details see page 72 N CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data Proceed with caution PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 199 seoi eg 1900 YUM 1uounujsu INO SUISA wn D gt o A m ES lt O Es S z aa c o E 2 5 n E i 8 gt eo amp un 2 200 Connecting a Computer or USB Device Backing up your data to a computer B Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you ve saved data to a USB storage device you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer then archive and organize the files as desired Simply recon nect the device as shown below Saves internal data to a USB storage device _ USB storage device Computer USB TO DEVICE terminal Ins
361. xecute the edition and this but ton changes to UNDO letting you restore the original data if you re not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results The Undo function only has one level only the previous operation can be undone 4 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data N CAUTION Save the data in the Style Selection display page 73 The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation page 73 se Ais jueuirueduioooy ony y Sunip3 pue Bunea Suis PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual 125 un D gt Es A c E cz G o E o o 9 o g 5 i o0 c zZ UO ui cO c GS o0 c B I e 9 ob c uu 126 Style Creator PSR S900 S700 Owner s Manual E GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the feel of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing clock of the Style The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied In other words if 8 Beat is selected Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes if 12 Beat is selected Groove timing is applied to 8th note triplets BEAT CONVERTER SWING Actually changes the timing of the beats specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above to the selected value For example when ORIGIN
362. y available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics you may be able to play back the data without any problem or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back If you run into problems playing back data please refer to the information below Sequence Formats Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different systems referred to as sequence formats Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the Song data matches that of the MIDI device The PSR S900 S700 is compatible with the following for mats SMF Standard MIDI file This is the most common sequence format Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types Format 0 or Format 1 Many MIDI devices are compati ble with Format 0 and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0 The PSR S900 S700 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1 Song data recorded on the PSR S900 S700 is auto matically saved as SMF Format 0 ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha s MIDI devices including the PSR S900 S700 series instruments This is a common format used with various Yamaha software The PSR S900 S700 is compatible with ESEQ e XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF Standard MIDI File format with greater functionality and open ended expandability for the future
363. y does this instantly call up all the settings Voices effects etc that match the 2 3 4 current Style it also automatically turns on o fe fo e ACMP and SYNC START so that you can immediately start playing the Style ONE TOUCH SETTING 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand the selected Style starts BOG Parameter Lock You can lock specific parameters e g effect split point etc to make them selectable only via the panel controls page 137 Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections OTS Link The convenient OTS One Touch Setting Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section A D To use the OTS Link function press the OTS LINK button BET Setting the timing for OTS changes The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings page 109 Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups Set up the panel controls such as Voice Style effects MEMORY and so on as desired Press the MEMORY button i ONE TOUCH SETTING Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING 1 4 buttons As it is possible to save the panel settings with another 3 3 file step 4 register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4 A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings
364. y to the CHORD and 1 16 tab displays in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 162 When the 1 16 tab display is elected press the F button to select the channel to be edited 2 Move the cursor to the desired data To move the cursor up or down eesss Use the A B button To move the cursor to the top data Press the C button To move the cursor by Measure Beat Clock units Use the 1 A V 3 A W buttons 3 Edit the data Editing the data line by line Use the 6 A V 8 A buttons to cut copy paste insert delete the events Editing each parameter of the data 1 Use the D E buttons to select the parameter to be edited 2 Use the 4 A V l 5 A V buttons to edit the parameter value The DATA ENTRY dial can also be used To actually enter an edited value simply move the cursor away from the parameter To restore the original value press the 8 W CANCEL button before move the cursor 4 When the CHORD tab display is selected press the F EXPAND but ton to convert the data into Song data 5 Press the I SAVE button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data then save the data in the Song Selection display page 73 Z CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instru ment off without executing the Save operation page 73 Selecting multiple lines of data While holding
365. yback To Finish Playing FADE IN OUT OTS LINK AUTO FILL IN SYNC SYNC START ENDING rit STOP START STOP GH HH STYLE CONTROL MAIN VARIATION Oo Oo B C o I o Ml o A Oo o o M D f 9 Start stop Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL START STOP button is pressed 9 Ending This is used for the ending of the Song Each preset Style features three different endings When the ending is finished the Style stops automatically Press one of the ENDING rit I II buttons during Style playback You can have the ending gradually slow down ritardando by pressing the same ENDING rit button again while the ending is playing back BI If you press the ENDING rit I button in the middle of your performance a fill in automatically plays before the ENDING rit I Fade Out The Fade Out produces smooth fade outs when stopping the Style Press the FADE IN OUT button during Style playback DECH For details on setting the fade in and fade out time see page 108 SYNC SYNC START ACMP INTRO MAIN VARIATION BREAK ENDING rit STOP START STOP Oo Oo Oo Oo Oo o Oo o Oo Oo o Oo O o Oo I I il A B C D Tr I lI Iil mo v H STYLE CONTROL Synchro Stop When Synchro Stop is on you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the key

to Open Manual File - American Musical Supply

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents